Sie sind auf Seite 1von 379

C-DOT DSS MAX-XL

INSTALLATION MANUAL
S y s tem Section No. 401-305-0496

Practices Draft 03, August 1999

C-DOT DSS MAX-XL

INSTALLATION MANUAL

© 1999, C-DOT
Printed in India
C-DOT DSS MAX-XL

INSTALLATION MANUAL

DRAFT 03

AUGUST 1999

BHADRA 2056

SERIES 300 : INSTALLATION

CSP SECTION NO. 401-305-0496

THIS C–DOT SYSTEM PRACTICE REFERS TO THE C–DOT DIGITAL SWITCHING SYSTEM

MAIN AUTOMATIC EXCHANGE (ABBREVIATED AS C-DOT DSS MAX-XL IN THE REST OF

THIS PUBLICATION).

THE INFORMATION IN THIS SYSTEM PRACTICE IS FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES AND IS

SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.

A COMMENT FORM HAS BEEN INCLUDED AT THE END OF THIS PUBLICATION FOR

READER'S COMMENTS. IF THE FORM HAS BEEN USED, COMMENTS MAY BE ADDRESSED

TO THE DIRECTOR (SYSTEMS ), CENTRE FOR DEVELOPMENT OF TELEMATICS, 39, MAIN

PUSA ROAD, NEW DELHI - 110 005

© 1999 BY C–DOT, NEW DELHI.


PREFACE
The objective of this manual is to guide and provide the installer with the necessary
information about the installation of the C-DOT MAX-XL. It is for this reason that
more emphasis has been put on the overall installation information than the
detailed step by step procedures.
This manual includes various chapters on floor marking, grouting, iron work
installation, cable preparation and laying, IOP installation etc. Each chapter covers
a brief introduction about the activity, material and tools required for performing
the task and a description of the installation procedure. It is hoped this manual will
serve as a useful reference to the installer.
Table of Contents
Chapter 1. Floor Marking........................................................................................................................... 9

1.1. Introduction....................................................................................................................... 9

1.2. Standard Terms ................................................................................................................ 9

1.3. Material & Tools Required ............................................................................................. 10

1.4. Marking Procedure for Switch Room & IOP Room....................................................... 10

1.5. Marking of Suite Lines & Grouting Holes..................................................................... 12

1.6. Marking of IOP Room ..................................................................................................... 15

Chapter 2. Grouting.................................................................................................................................. 19

2.1. Introduction..................................................................................................................... 19

2.2. Material & Tools Required ............................................................................................. 19

2.3. Drilling............................................................................................................................. 19

2.4. Hole Preparation ............................................................................................................. 19

2.5. Expansion Bolt ................................................................................................................ 20

2.6. Insertion of the Bolt ........................................................................................................ 20

2.7. Tightening of the Bolt ..................................................................................................... 20

Chapter 3. Iron Work Installation ........................................................................................................... 23

3.1. Introduction..................................................................................................................... 23

3.2. Material and Tools Required.......................................................................................... 23

3.3. Iron Work Fixing............................................................................................................. 25

3.4. Assembly Items ............................................................................................................... 39

Chapter 4. IDP & DC Distribution Panel................................................................................................ 47

4.1. Introduction..................................................................................................................... 47

4.2. List of Material and Tools Required .............................................................................. 47

4.3. Intermediate Distribution Panel (IDP) ......................................................................... 47

4.4. DC Distribution Panels [DCDP's] .................................................................................. 49

Chapter 5. Cabinet Installation ............................................................................................................... 53

5.1. Introduction..................................................................................................................... 53

5.2. Material & Tools Required ............................................................................................. 53

5.3. Unpacking Cabinet ......................................................................................................... 54

5.4. Cabinet on Castors.......................................................................................................... 57


5.5. Moving the Cabinet on Basemount................................................................................ 57

5.6. Levelling/Mounting the Cabinet on Basemount ........................................................... 57

5.7. Ganging the Cabinets ..................................................................................................... 57

Chapter 6. MDF Installation.................................................................................................................... 63

6.1. Introduction..................................................................................................................... 63

6.2. Marking ........................................................................................................................... 63

6.3. MDF Installation ............................................................................................................ 63

Chapter 7. IOP & ADP Installation......................................................................................................... 78

7.1. Introduction..................................................................................................................... 78

7.2. IOP Installation .............................................................................................................. 78

7.3. MM-ADP Installation ..................................................................................................... 79

Chapter 8. Power Distribution Panel and its FBI Mounting................................................................. 85

8.1. Introduction..................................................................................................................... 85

8.2. PDP Installation ............................................................................................................. 85

8.3. Mounting of FBI Card..................................................................................................... 86

Chapter 9. IOP - PDP and OMA Installation ......................................................................................... 92

9.1. Introduction..................................................................................................................... 92

9.2. Installation of IOP-PDP.................................................................................................. 92

9.3. OMA Panel Assembly Installation................................................................................. 95

Chapter 10. Cable Preparation and Laying .............................................................................................. 99

10.1. Introduction................................................................................................................... 99

10.2. Crimping Procedure...................................................................................................... 99

10.3. Cable Preparation ....................................................................................................... 100

10.4. Ground Cables............................................................................................................. 100

10.5. DC Cables .................................................................................................................... 115

10.6. Signal Cables............................................................................................................... 190

10.7. MDF Cables................................................................................................................. 276

10.8. MAX MDF Wiring (General) ..................................................................................... 304

10.9. Cable List..................................................................................................................... 306


Chapter 11. Fuse Details & Placement ................................................................................................... 312

11.1. Introduction................................................................................................................. 312

11.2. Fuses Used in BM-XL ................................................................................................. 312

11.3. Fuses Used in LM ....................................................................................................... 313

11.4. Fuses Used in IOPs (IOP0 & IOP1).......................................................................... 313

11.5. Fuses Used for ADP .................................................................................................... 313

11.6. Fuses Used in CM-XL ................................................................................................. 313

11.7. Fuses/MCBs Used in Suite PDP ................................................................................ 313

11.8. Fuses/MCBs Used in IOP-PDP .................................................................................. 314

11.9. Fuses/MCB Used in DCDP......................................................................................... 314

11.10. Consolidated List of Fuses and MCBs..................................................................... 314

Chapter 12. Operator Positions ............................................................................................................... 316

Chapter 13. Invertor Arrangement.......................................................................................................... 317

13.1. Introduction................................................................................................................. 317

13.2. Inverter Input.............................................................................................................. 317

13.3. Inverter Output Supply Distribution ........................................................................ 317

Chapter 14. Sign Writing ......................................................................................................................... 320

14.1. Introduction................................................................................................................. 320

14.2. Sign Writing Format................................................................................................... 320

Chapter 15. VDU & Printer Setting ........................................................................................................ 323

15.1. Introduction................................................................................................................. 323

15.2. VDU Setting ................................................................................................................ 323

15.3. Printer Setting ............................................................................................................ 326

Chapter 16. Jumper Settings ................................................................................................................... 328

16.1. Introduction................................................................................................................. 328

16.2. Description of Jumper Types...................................................................................... 328

16.3. Jumper Settings IN BM-XL/LM ................................................................................ 329

16.4. Jumper Settings in CM-XL ........................................................................................ 339

16.5. Jumper Settings in IOP .............................................................................................. 341

Chapter 17. Power-ON Procedure ........................................................................................................... 345

17.1. Introduction................................................................................................................. 345

17.2. Visual Inspection......................................................................................................... 345


17.3. Electrical Tests............................................................................................................ 346

Chapter 18. Functional Testing ............................................................................................................... 348

18.1. Introduction................................................................................................................. 348

18.2. Software Installation .................................................................................................. 348

18.3. AM Testing .................................................................................................................. 349

18.4. AM Diagnostics ........................................................................................................... 350

18.5. SCU Testing ................................................................................................................ 351

18.6. SCU Diagnostics ......................................................................................................... 352

18.7. BM Equipping ............................................................................................................. 354

18.8. BTU Testing ................................................................................................................ 354

18.9. SSU Testing................................................................................................................. 357

18.10. BM Testing Set up .................................................................................................... 358

18.11. SUM and ISTU Testing ............................................................................................ 361

18.12. System Initialisation in Different Configurations.................................................. 362

18.13. Inter BM Testing....................................................................................................... 362

18.14. Alarm Testing............................................................................................................ 363

18.15. System Stability ........................................................................................................ 364

18.16. Load Testing.............................................................................................................. 368

18.17. Exchange Synchronisation with Network Clock..................................................... 369

Appendix-I BM Equipage Procedure ...................................................................................................... 371

Appendix - II Modifications for Enhanced Subscriber Service Unit (ESU) Equipment......................... 376

Appendix - III ISTU Related Remarks........................................................................................................ 377

Appendix - IV Procedure for Network Synchronization ............................................................................ 378

F:\HOME\MAX-XL\WORD\XLINSTMN.DOC September 27, 2000


Chapter 1.

Floor Marking

1.1. INTRODUCTION
As a first step towards the installation of Exchange equipment (iron work, IOP-
PDP), the floor should be marked as per the exchange layout. Floor markings are
done in Switch Room where the main switching equipment is placed and IOP Room
where the input output processors with consoles are placed. The main aim of this
marking is to locate the exact position of the grouting holes which are used for
fixing the equipment in the respective rooms. This chapter covers the materials and
tools required and the detailed marking procedure. However, before carrying out
the floor marking, certain standard terms need to be understood and are therefore
defined.

1.2. STANDARD TERMS

1.2.1. Floor

Floor means the normal floor covered with suitable antistatic material.

1.2.2. Datum Line

A datum line is a straight line drawn through the maximum no. of points
located at a distance, say D, from the wall of the Switch Room/IOP Room.

1.2.3. Reference Point

It is a point on the Switch Room/IOP Room floor to which the datum lines
and subsequent measurements are related. It is also defined as the
intersection point of the two datum lines drawn at right angles to each other.

1.2.4. Suite End Line

This is the line drawn parallel to one of the datum line from which the suite
will begin or start growing.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 9
Chapter 1.

1.2.5. Suite Lines

These are the lines drawn parallel to the other datum line (one referred in
suite end line) perpendicular to suite end line and coincide with the periphery
of the Base mount Assembly.

1.2.6. IOP Lines

These are the lines drawn parallel to one of the datum lines, and coincide
with the periphery of the IOP cabinet.

1.3. MATERIAL & TOOLS REQUIRED


S. NO. DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

1. T Square (1 meter) 1

2. One meter long flat steel scale 2

3. String (silk thread) for marking 10 M

4. Ultra marine indigo or Blue ink for temporary 1


marking

5. Highlight marking pens of black ink 4 Kg

6. Steel measuring tape of 15M length 2

7. Set Square 1

8. Brass Screws (2mm to 3mm with a cut on top) 30

1.4. MARKING PROCEDURE FOR SWITCH ROOM & IOP ROOM

1.4.1. Marking of First Datum Line

Mark some points along the length of the room at a distance of 600mm from
the wall. Draw a line such that it passes through a maximum number of the
points. To draw the line, soak a silk string of required length in ultra marine
indigo or blue ink. Place it over the points by holding the string tightly at
both the ends. Pull the string from the middle and release it so that it leaves
an impression on the floor. This line is called the first datum line. Refer Fig.
1.1.

1.4.2. Locating Reference Point

Mark a point on the first datum line at a distance of 600mm from the
adjacent wall. This point is called the Reference Point. Fix a brass screw at
the Reference point to mark it permanently. This point is denoted as `X' in
Fig. 1.1.

10 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


FLOOR MARKING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 11
Chapter 1.

1.4.3. Marking the Second Datum Line

The second datum line should be perpendicular to the first datum line. To
ensure this, the 3-4-5-triangle rule is adopted and the second datum line is
drawn passing through the reference point.
With a steel tape measure a length of 900mm or a multiple of 300mm (say
Nx300mmm) from the reference point and mark a point on the first datum
line. Let us call this point as 'Y'. (Fig. 1.2).
From the reference point 'X' draw an arc at a distance of 1200mm or a
multiple of 400mm (say Nx400 mm) in the direction approximately
perpendicular to the first datum line. To draw an arc use a pen tied to one
end of a string. Draw another arc at a distance of 1500mm or a multiple of
500mm (say Nx500mm) from the point 'Y' on the first datum line such that it
intersects the earlier arc. Let us call the intersection point as 'Z'. Obtain
several points in a similar way. Draw a line from the reference point such
that it passes through maximum number of these points. To draw the line
use the string dipped in ultra marine indigo or blue ink.
Fix some brass screws along the datum lines with a clearance of 2M between
them.

1.5. MARKING OF SUITE LINES & GROUTING HOLES


The suite lines are drawn as shown in Fig. 1.3 as per the procedure outlined in
section 1.4. The length and width of a full suite are 8590 mm and 624 mm
respectively. The inter-suite distance is maintained at 1000 mm. The clearance
between wall and first suite is fixed at 1000 mm. The minimum clearance between
the wall and the last suite shall be more than 1000 mm.

1.5.1. Marking of Suite Lines

Draw a line parallel to the second datum line at a distance of 1600 mm from
it. This is referred to as the suite end line as shown in Fig. 1.3. Now draw a
line at a distance of 400 mm from and parallel to the first datum line. This is
referred as the suite line. Now other suite lines can be drawn parallel to this
suite line at a distance of 624 mm, 1624 mm, 2248 mm, 3248 mm, 3872 mm,
4872 mm, 5496 mm, 6496 mm and 7120 mm. These suite lines should be of
8590 mm length.

1.5.2. Marking of Grouting Holes

Fig. 1.3 shows a typical switch room grouting hole markings for a five suite
configuration of C-DOT MAX-XL. These holes are used for fixing the iron
work on the floor.

12 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


FLOOR MARKING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 13
Chapter 1.

14 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


FLOOR MARKING

Basemount assemblies of the first suite will be placed on the first and second
suite line. Basemount assemblies of the second suite will be placed on the
third and fourth suite line and so on.
A typical MAX-XL switch room layout for a five suite configuration is shown
in Fig. 1.4. It is to be noted that number of suites required depends on the
capacity and configuration of the switch.
A typical TAX-XL switch room layout for a 6K trunk configuration is shown
in Fig. 1.4 (a). For higher capacity (>6K) TAX one more suite will be added
and CM will then be installed in third suite.

1.6. MARKING OF IOP ROOM


Datum lines are drawn in the IOP room as per the procedure adopted above. Refer
Fig. 1.5. Marking of IOP lines has to be made in such a way that the clearance
between the two IOPs is not less than 750 mm, and also the clearance between the
wall and any of the two IOPs is not less than 750 mm. IOP-PDP is also mounted in
the IOP room for the distribution of DC power to the IOPs.
For marking of IOP-PDP position in IOP room, draw a line parallel to second datum
line at a distance of 150 mm away from it. Next draw a line perpendicular to the
second datum line at a distance of 500 mm from the first datum line. The placement
of IOPs, console tables and IOP-PDP are shown in Fig. 1.5.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 15
Chapter 1.

16 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


INSTALLATION MANUAL
\DESIGN\DSSMAX\MAX-XL\MAX-XLIM\MXI-EL1

17
FLOOR MARKING
Chapter 1.

18 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


Chapter 2.

Grouting

2.1. INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the procedure for preparation of holes used for fixing the iron
work of the multimodule MAX-XL on the floor.

2.2. MATERIAL & TOOLS REQUIRED


S. NO. DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

1. Expansion Bolts 16 per suite

2. Concrete Electrical drilling machine with accessories 1

3. Carbide tip spiral drilling bit (32mm) Chromium steel drilling 1


bit (for hand holes)

4. A flat mild steel plate 150mmx150mmx6mm thick 1

5. Cement + some quick drying compound for repair of hole 1 Kg

6. Vacuum Cleaner 1

7. Steel Rod (length of 200mm, dia 32mm) 1

2.3. DRILLING
The marked points ‘+’ (refer Fig. 1.5) serve as the centre point for drilling. An
electrical concrete drilling machine with 32 mm carbide tip spiral bit is used for
drilling on concrete floor. During drilling, care is taken for the hole to be straight
and there is no chipping/cracking of the mosaic tiles.

2.4. HOLE PREPARATION


Fixing of the iron work on the floor requires preparation of hole of exactly 32mm
diameter. During drilling of the holes with 32mm drilling bit the hole may not have
a proper shape. A steel rod of 32mm diameter is used to check proper shape and
depth of the hole. If a hole gets cracked during drilling, ordinary cement mixed with
a little quick drying compound like plaster of paris can be used to repair it. A hole
with a minimum depth of 105mm should be drilled. The extra drilled portion of the
hole gets filled with the cement. This gives strength to the hole to sustain the

INSTALLATION MANUAL 19
Chapter 2.

expansion of the grouting bolt. To clear material from the hole a vacuum cleaner is
used.

2.5. EXPANSION BOLT


The Expansion Bolt of high grade malleable iron consists of segmented shield with
an internal expander nut (same as the English Rawl bolt specification). The steel
ferrule (cup) fitted on the top provides for a limited amount of compression which
enables the machinery/equipment to be clamped tightly against the mounting
surface.
In Bolt Projecting type (BP type) expansion bolt which has an internal expander
nut, the fixing is done by tightening of the nut over the projecting bolts after the
equipment is lifted into the position. A typical projecting type bolt is shown in Fig.
2.1.

2.6. INSERTION OF THE BOLT


The Expansion Bolt is inserted into the hole completely, with the expander nut
leading in. A flat steal plate of 150mm x 150mm x 6mm is used to flatten the steel
ferrule prior to loading on the bolt. At the time of insertion care is taken that the
bolt is kept straight and perpendicular to the floor. Refer A in Fig. 2.2.

2.7. TIGHTENING OF THE BOLT


The hexagonal nut is tightened along with a washer. This is done with a proper
spanner. During tightening the expander nut is drawn up the shield assembly on
account of complimentary tapers given, thus forcing the segments apart. During
tightening care is taken not to exceed the maximum tightening torque specified.
Refer B and C of Fig. 2.2.
After the nut is tightened to the fullest extent, the nut is removed from the bolt. The
flat plate used for flattening the steel ferrule is also removed.
The installation/erection of the basemount is done on the bolts thus grouted on the
floor. Refer D of Fig. 2.2.

20 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


GROUTING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 21
Chapter 2.

22 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


Chapter 3.

Iron Work Installation

3.1. INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the procedure and component details for installation of the
iron work which is a structure required for mounting cabinets and cabling C-DOT
MAX-XL.

3.2. MATERIAL AND TOOLS REQUIRED


The switch room mechanical hardware for various configurations of C-DOT MAX-
XL comprises the following:
Sl. No. CDOT PART NO. Description Quantity Required

1/2 Suite 1 Suite 2 Suite 3 Suite 4 Suite 5


Suite

1. MAI-WKSTZ000-301 Base Mount Assy-1 2 3 6 9 12 15

2. MAI-WKSTZ001-301 Base Mount Assy-2 1 2 3 4 5

3. MPI-WKSTZ006-401 Base Mount Spacer 8 16 32 48 64 80

4. MPI-WKSTZ003-401 Base Joining Plate 1 2 4 6 8 10

5. MAP-WKSTZ082-201 Vertical Pillar Assy (FS) 1 1 2 3 4 5

6. MAI-WKSTZ003-201 Vertical Pillar Assy 1 2 4 6 8 10

7. MAI-WKSTZ072-301 Support Box Assy (mm) 2 3 6 9 12 15

8. MAI-WKSTZ005-201 Child Trough Assy 1 2 4 6 8 10

9. MAI-WKSTZ076-301 Mother Trough Assy 1 1 1 1 1 1 1


(Left-mm)

10. MPI-WKSTZ161-301 Mother PWR Trough 1 1 1 1 1 1 1


(Left-mm)

11. MAI-WKSTZ031-301 Mother Trough Assy-1 1 1 1 1 1


(Right)

12. MPI-WKSTZ126-401 End Plate-3 2 1 2 2 2 2

13. MPI-WKSTZ125-401 End Plate-2 1 1 1 1 1 1

14. MPI-WKSTZ160-301 End Plate-1 1 1 1 1 1 1

15. MPI-WKSTZ146-401 Cover Plate (Support 3 3 3 3 3 3


Box )

INSTALLATION MANUAL 23
Chapter 3.

Sl. No. CDOT PART NO. Description Quantity Required

1/2 Suite 1 Suite 2 Suite 3 Suite 4 Suite 5


Suite

16. MPI-WKSTZ054-401 Tie Rod - M10 4 8 8 8 8 8

17. MPI-WKSTZ055-401 Tie Rod Clamp 8 16 16 16 16 16

18. MPI-WKSTZ056-401 Trough Support Angle 2 4 4 4 4 4

19. MAI-WKSTZ077-401 Box Cover Assy-1 (mm) 1 1 2 3 4 5

20. MAI-WKSTZ078-401 Box Cover Assy-2 (mm) 1 1 2 3 4 5

21. MAI-WKSTZ067-101 Side Cover Assy 2 4 8 12 16 20

22. MPM-AXCBZ030-401 Hook Pin 8 16 32 48 64 80

23. MPI-WKSTZ111-401 Foot (Pillar Door) 8 16 32 48 64 80

24. MPI-WKSTZ170-301 False Panel (BM) 2 4 8 12 16 20

25. MAI-WKSTZ079-301 False Panel Assy-2 2 4 8 12 16 20


(Trough)

26. MAI-WKSTZ080-301 False Panel Assy-3 2 4 8 12 16 20


(Trough)

27. MCW-PLSTP003-401 Washer, Steel-M16 8 16 32 48 64 80

28. MCW-SPSTS009-401 Spring Washer-M16 8 16 32 48 64 80

29. MCN-HESTM003-401 Nut Hex STL -M16 8 16 32 48 64 80

30. MCS-HESTM032-401 SCR Hex STL – M18x60 12 18 36 54 72 90

31. MCW-PLSTS005-401 Washer STL-M18 25 50 100 150 200 250

32. MCW-SPSTS010-401 Washer SPR.STL-M18 25 50 100 150 200 250

33. MCS-HESTM031-401 SCR Hex STL - M18x35 16 32 64 96 128 160

34. MCS-HESTM002-401 SCR Hex STL - M8x20 35 56 82 120 160 200

35. MCW-HESSP006-401 Washer-M8 45 74 118 174 234 294

36. MCW-SPSTS006-401 Washer SPR.STL-M8 45 74 118 174 234 294

37. MCN-HESTM000-401 Nut Hex STL - M8 12 12 12 12 12 12

38. MCS-HESTM006-401 SCR Hex STL-M8x50 9 18 36 54 72 90

39. MCW-RHPEG008-401 NUTSERT Cover-M8 20 36 86 126 166 206

40. MCW-PLSTP001-401 Washer STL-M10 24 24 24 24 24 24

41. MCW-SPSTS007-401 Washer SPR.STL-M10 24 24 24 24 24 24

42. MCN-HESTM001-401 Nut Hex STL - M10 24 24 24 24 24 24

43. MCS-CHSSM038-401 SCR CH HD SST - 32 32 64 96 128 160


M4.0x12

44. MCW-CHSSZ005-401 Plain Washer-M4.0 32 32 64 96 128 160

45. MCS-CSSSZ044-401 SCR SCK SST- M4.0x12 4 4 8 12 16 20

46. MCS-HESSM045-401 SCR Hex SST M6x12 8 8 16 24 32 40

47. MPI-WKSTZ135-401 Liner-1 15 30 60 90 120 150

24 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


IRON WORK INSTALLATION

Sl. No. CDOT PART NO. Description Quantity Required

1/2 Suite 1 Suite 2 Suite 3 Suite 4 Suite 5


Suite

48. MPI-WKSTZ136-401 Liner-2 15 30 60 90 120 150

49. MPI-WKSTZ137-401 Liner-3 15 30 60 90 120 150

50. MPI-WKSTZ138-401 Liner-4 15 30 60 90 120 150

51. MPI-WKSTZ139-401 Liner-5 15 30 60 90 120 150

52. MPI-WKSTZ140-401 Liner-6 15 30 60 90 120 150

53. MAI-WKSTZ058-401 Castor Guide Assy 2 2 4 4 4 4

54. MPI-WKSTZ113-401 Castor Guide Plate 2 2 4 4 4 4

55. MAI-WKSTZ026-301 Mother Trough Assy 2 - 1 2 3 4


(Left)

56. MPI-WKSTZ050-301 Mother PWR Trough2 - 1 2 3 4

57. MAI-WKSTA032-301 Mother Trough Assy 2 - 1 3 3 4


(Right)

58. MAI-WKSTZ028-301 Mother Trough Assy - 1 1 1 1


(Middle)

59. MAI-WKSTZ171-301 END Plate 5 - 1 2 3 4

3.3. IRON WORK FIXING

3.3.1. Base Mount Assembly Fixing on the Floor


The floor is ready for fixing the basemount assembly after completion of the
following activities.
♦ Floor marking as detailed in Chapter No.1
♦ Grouting as detailed in Chapter No. 2
There are two types of basemount assemblies called basemount assembly-1
and basemount assembly-2. Fig. 3.1 shows how these assemblies look like.
Basemount assembly-2 accommodates two cabinets whereas Basemount
assembly-1 can accommodate two cabinets and one vertical pillar assembly.
One full suite consists of 8 cabinets and 3 vertical pillar assemblies. The
arrangement for mounting four basemount assemblies (3 basemount
assembly-1 and 1 basemount assembly-2) is depicted in Fig. 3.2. The gap
maintained between basemount assemblies is also shown. Basemount
assembly-1 is not identical at both ends. One end is thicker than the other for
accommodating one vertical pillar assembly. The first two basemount
assembly-1 are mounted as mirror image of each other. This should be taken
care while mounting the basemount assemblies. The basemount assembly
has four oblong holes of size 36 mm x 18 mm to accommodate 4 grouting bolts

INSTALLATION MANUAL 25
Chapter 3.

26 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


IRON WORK INSTALLATION

(size M16) already fixed on the floor. There are 8 more holes having floating
nut for fixing of cabinets. Before the basemount is placed, it has to be ensured
that the basemount spacer is placed on each grouting bolt to arrest the
movement of grouting bolt. The basemount is now placed in such a way that
all the four grouting bolts are well inserted into the basemount holes. The
fixing is done with M16 nut, spring washer and plain washer. The mounting
procedure is shown in Fig. 3.2. Before fixing the basemount with bolts,
levelling is done using a spirit level. Wherever leveling is to be adjusted,
liner-1, liner-2 and liner-3 which are of different thickness can be used. These
liners can be placed between the floor and the basemount to take care of
uneven levels. After this the bolts can be tightened. The detail of the items
like bolts, washer etc. required for fixing one basemount assembly are given
in Table 3.4.1.
Fig. 3.2 illustrates how the first two and the last two basemount assemblies
in a suite are joined using Base joining-plate. So only two joining plates are
required to assemble all the four basemount assemblies meant for one full
suite. Table 3.4.2 gives the list of fasteners required for fixing one base
joining plate. A gap of 4mm should be maintained between two assemblies
while fixing the joining plates as shown in detail of ‘B’ in Fig.3.2. Similarly a
gap of 17 mm should be ensured between second and third basemount assy
where no joining plate is used. This is shown in detail of `A’ in Fig.3.2.

3.3.2. Fixing of Vertical Pillar Assembly on Basemount Assembly

There are two types of vertical pillar assemblies. One designated as vertical
pillar assembly (Front) is provided with Power Distribution Panel (PDP) for
the suite and is located in the beginning of the suite. The other vertical pillar
assemblies are located at the end of second basemount assembly and the end
of the suite. The locations of these vertical pillar assemblies of the suite are
shown in Fig.3.3. The vertical pillar assemblies should be mounted in such a
way that there is a clearance of 3mm between the edge of the base mount
assembly and the vertical pillar assembly as shown in detail of `A’ in Fig.3.4.
The vertical pillar assemblies are fixed to the basemount assemblies using
M18x60 bolts with washers. Any small dimensional inaccuracies in the pitch
of the holes between pillar and basemount is taken care of by the float nut
arrangement provided in the basemount. A plumb bob is used to check that
the vertical pillars have been mounted in an exactly vertical position. The
vertical pillars are supplied with side covers on both sides. While fixing it on
the basemount assembly, one of the covers is removed to have access to the
fixing holes and the cover is replaced after the installation is completed.
Items required for fixing one vertical pillar assembly is given in Table 3.4.3.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 27
Chapter 3.

28 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


IRON WORK INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION MANUAL 29
Chapter 3.

30 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


IRON WORK INSTALLATION

3.3.3. Fixing of Support Box Assembly on Vertical Pillar

Having fixed the vertical pillars as described in section 3.3.2. Support box
assembly is required to be fixed on the top of each vertical pillar as shown in
Fig. 3.4 which gives the isometric view. The support box is fixed on the
vertical pillar using M8x50 hexagonal screws with plain washers and spring
washers. The bottom view of the support box after it is placed on the top of
the vertical pillar assy (Front) is clearly shown in Fig.3.4. A cut of 204 mm
has been provided for guiding the support box to rest on the vertical pillar
assembly. Support box has a length of 634 mm. This cut of 204 mm is not in
the centre. A length of 200 mm on left and 230 mm on right is shown. While
fixing this support box care should be taken to ensure that 230 mm portion
falls on right hand side as viewed from front side of the suite. It holds good
for all support boxes.

3.3.4. Mounting of Mother Trough Assemblies


A cable runway is installed at a height of 2500 mm on the wall, behind suite
1, parallel to suite length to carry power, ground, subscriber and trunk cables
to all cabinets. The standard separation between this wall and suite 1 shall
be 1000 mm. These cables enter into the suites through mother trough. While
mounting cable runway supports on the back wall of first suite on which the
cable runway is to be laid, it must be ensured that it does not cause
obstructions for laying mother trough assemblies at the beginning and end of
the suite.
There are 3 types of mother trough assemblies viz; mother trough assembly
(left), mother trough assembly (right) and mother trough assembly (middle).
Mother trough assembly (left) connects the cable runway to the vertical pillar
assembly (front) at the beginning of the first suite. Then from this vertical
pillar assembly (front) to the vertical pillar assembly (front) at the beginning
of the second suite. Like this for second suite to third suite and so on. Mother
trough assembly (right) connects cable runway to the vertical pillar assembly
at the end of the first suite. Then from this vertical pillar assembly to the
vertical pillar assembly at the end of the second suite. Then from second suite
to the third suite and so on. Inter connection for the Mother trough assembly
(middle) are little different. There is no Mother trough assembly (middle)
between cable runway and the first suite. The left side and right side is as
seen from the front side of the suite. All power cables and ground cables enter
through mother trough assembly (left) only for termination on Power
Distribution Panel (PDP). Subscriber and trunk cables can enter from both
mother trough assembly (left) and mother trough assembly (right) depending
upon the location of the Basemodule or Line module on the suite where it is
to be terminated. The shorter length path should be selected. Mother trough
assembly (middle) carries intercabinet cables viz; BM-CM data and clock
cables.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 31
Chapter 3.

3.3.4.1. Mounting of Mother Trough Assy (Left)


Mother trough assembly (L) consists of mother power trough and mother
trough (L). To interconnect cable runway and suite 1, mother power trough-1
and mother trough-1 (L) are used. Interconnection of suites 1 & 2 and suites
2 & 3 are carried out using mother power trough-2 and mother trough assy-2
(L).
Place the mother trough assy 1 (L) and mother power trough-1 between the
wall and the first suite such that one end of the assembly rests over the
support box on the vertical pillar assy (front) of suite 1. Place the power
trough on the left side and the mother trough adjacent to it as shown in Fig.
3.5. Support the assembly at the wall end by two support angles fixed to the
cable runway using tie rods. The placement of mother trough assy (L) and
fixing procedure are shown in Fig 3.5 and Fig. 3.6. The trough is then
screwed to support angles. At the support box end fixing is done using M8X50
hex. screws. The list of items required are listed in table 3.4.5.
Mother trough assy-2 (L) and mother power trough-2 are placed and fixed
over the support boxes on vertical pillar assy (front) of suite 1 and suite 2. In
the same manner mother power trough assembly is extended to suite 3 from
suite 2 using mother power trough-2 and mother trough- 2 (L).
3.3.4.2. Mounting of Mother Trough Assy (Right)
In an identical way as for mounting mother trough assy (L), mother trough
assy (R) is mounted and fixed, but on the right side of the suites. Mother
trough assy 1 (R) is used to connect cable runway and suite 1 and mother
trough assy-2 (R) is used to connect suite 1 & 2 and suites 2 & 3. This is
shown in Fig. 3.12.
3.3.4.3. Mounting of Mother Trough Assy (Middle)
Mother trough assy (middle) is placed on the support boxes of the vertical
pillars (middle) and screwed using hex. screws and washers. Mother trough
assy (M) is used to connect suites 1 & 2. This is shown in Fig. 3.12. And for
connecting vertical pillars (middle) of suites 2 and 3, mother trough assy-2
(Right) is used. Also for suite 3 & 4 vertical pillars (middle), mother trough
assy-2 (Right) is used. This has not been shown in any figure as all the
figures are only for two suites. This will be used only from third suite onward.
3.3.4.4. Mounting of Child Trough Assembly
Each full suite requires two child trough assemblies. The assembled
child trough assembly consists of child trough assembly (right) and child
trough assembly (left) and the child trough joining plate. The joining of these
two child trough assembly parts by joining plate is shown in Fig.3.7. Child
trough assembly has a raised section in the centre to accommodate all power
cables. The power cables coming from mother power trough are routed

32 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


IRON WORK INSTALLATION

through this section. This raised section divides the child trough in two
portions. The portion towards the front side of the cabinet is used to lay
subscribers and trunk cables coming from mother trough. The other portion
on the rear side of the cabinet is used to lay the Base module to central
module cables. In each child trough assembly, there are two such sections one
on the left hand side and the other on the right hand side of the assembly
namely power trough (left) and power trough (right) respectively. The child
trough assembly is mounted on two support box assemblies of a suite. Six
nos. of bolts of size M8X20 alongwith washer are used for fixing the child
trough assembly with the support box. The fixing procedure is shown in Fig.
3.8 and Fig.3.9. List of materials required for fixing one child trough
assembly to support boxes is given in Table 3.4.6. The alignment of the
vertical pillar is checked with the help of plumb bob and then the nuts, bolts
are tightened. Nut insert covers are used over the nuts to avoid scratches on
cables while laying.
After routing all the cables False panel assembly-2 (trough) and false panel
assembly-3 (trough) are fixed on to the child trough. Each panel is meant for
two cabinets. With this, the cables dropping from child trough to the cabinets
are not visible from the front and from the rear. Each child trough assembly
is fixed with false panel assembly-2 (trough) and false panel assembly-3
(trough) on left and right side of the assembly on both the front and rear side
as shown in Fig.3.14.
The opening formed between the mother trough assembly and child trough
assembly on the support box on the vertical pillar assembly (front) of the last
suite is covered by End plate-2. This is shown in Fig.3.13.
The opening formed between the mother trough assembly and child trough
assembly on the support box on the middle vertical pillar of the last suite is
covered by End plate- 3. (Refer Fig.3.13)
All openings between the mother trough assembly (R) and child trough
assembly on the support boxes on the vertical pillar on Right Side of the
suites, except the last suite, is covered by end plate-5. (Refer Fig.3.13)
The opening between the mother trough assembly (R) and child trough
assembly on the support box of the Vertical pillar on right side of the last
suite is covered by End Plate-I. (Refer Fig.3.13)
The uncovered portion in the support box assembly on the vertical pillar assy
(front) is covered by cover plate (support box). (Refer Fig.3.13)

INSTALLATION MANUAL 33
Chapter 3.

34 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


IRON WORK INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION MANUAL 35
Chapter 3.

36 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


IRON WORK INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION MANUAL 37
Chapter 3.

38 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


IRON WORK INSTALLATION

For an exchange of 2 suites configurations it has been shown in Fig.3.13 that


End plate-1, 2 & 3 have been used to seal the uncovered portion. But in case
the exchange has 3 suites then these plates will have to be removed and
respective trough assemblies will be used to have interconnection between
suite 2 and suite 3. Then suite 3 uncovered portion will be sealed with these
plates as shown in Fig.3.13.

3.3.5. Cabinet Placement

Fig.3.10 shows the view after placement of eight cabinets on the Basemount
assemblies. It is suggested that the cabinets should be erected on the first
suite before taking up the installation of second suite and subsequent suites.

3.3.6. Erection of Subsequent Suites

After the erection of first suite, and cabinet placement, second suite erection
is to be done as shown in Fig. 3.11. It is similar to the first suite. The
interconnecting trough assemblies are different which are clearly shown in
Fig.3.12.

3.4. ASSEMBLY ITEMS


Table 3.4.1 Base Mount Assembly fixing with Floor
Sl. No. CDOT PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY.
1. MAI-WKSTZ000-301 Base mount assy-1 1
OR
MAI-WKSTZ001-301 Base mount assy-2 1
2. MAI-PLSTP003-401 Washer, Steel M-16 4
3. MCW-SPSTS009-401 Spring Washer-M16 4
4. MPI-WKSTZ135-401 Liner-1
5. MPI-WKSTZ136-401 Liner-2
6. MPI-WKSTZ137-401 Liner-3
7. MCN-HESTM003-401 Nut Hex Steel-M16 4
Table 3.4.2 Base Joining Plate Fixing with Base Mount Assembly
Sl. No. CDOT PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY.
1. MAI-WKSTZ000-301 Base mount assy 1 1
2. MAI-WKSTZ001-301 Base mount assy 2 1
3. MPI-WKSTZ003-401 Base Joining Plate 1
4. MCS-HESTM002-401 SCR HEX STL M8x20 8
5. MCW-HESSP006-401 Washer - MB 8
6. MCW-SPSTS006-401 Washer SPR. STL - M8 8

INSTALLATION MANUAL 39
Chapter 3.

40 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


IRON WORK INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION MANUAL 41
Chapter 3.

42 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


IRON WORK INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION MANUAL 43
Chapter 3.

44 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


IRON WORK INSTALLATION

Table 3.4.3 Vertical Pillar Assembly Fixing on Base Mount Assembly


Sl. No. CDOT PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY.

1. MAI-WKSTZ082-201 Vertical Pillar Assembly 1

OR (FS ) OR

MAI-WKSTZ003-201 Vertical Pillar Assembly 1

2. MCS-HESTM032-401 SCR HEX STL M18x60 6

3. MCW-SPSTS010-401 Washer SPR STL-M18 6

4. MCW-PLSTS005-401 Washer STL-M18 6

Table 3.4.4 Support Box Assembly Fixing with Vertical Pillar Assembly
Sl. No. CDOT PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY.

1. MAI-WKSTZ072-301 Support Box Assembly 1


(mm)

2. MCS-HESTM006-401 SCR HEX STL M8x50 6

3. MCW-HESSP006-401 Washer-M8 6

4. MCW-SPSTS006-401 Washer SPR STL-M8 6

Table 3.4.5 Mother Trough Assy. and Power Trough (end) Fixing with Cable Ladder
(Left Side)
Sl. No. CDOT PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY.

1. MAI-WKSTZ076-301 Mother Trough Assembly-1 1

2. MPI-WKSTZ161-301 Mother Power Trough-1 1

3. MCS-HESTM002-401 SCR HEX STL-M8x20 8

4. MCW-HESSP006-401 Washer M8 8

5. MCW-SPSTS006-401 Washer SPR STL-M8 8

6. MPI-WKSTZ054-301 Tie Rod-M10 4

7. MPI-WKSTZ055-401 Tie Road Clamp 8

8. MPI-SKSTZ056-401 Trough Support Angle 2

9. MCW-PLSTP001-401 Washer STL-M10 12

10. MCW-SPSTS007-401 Washer SPR STL-M10 12

11. MCN-HESTM001-401 Nut Hex STL-M10 12

INSTALLATION MANUAL 45
Chapter 3.

Table 3.4.6 Child Trough Assy. Fixing with Support Box Assembly
Sl. No. CDOT PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY.

1. MAI-WKSTZ005-201 Child Trough Assembly-1 1

2. MCS-HESSM052-401 SCR HEX SST M8x20 12

3. MCW-HESSP006-401 Washer SPR STL-M8 12

4. MCW-SPSTS006-401 Washer SPR STL-M8 12

5. MCW-RHPEG008-401 Nut Sert Cover-M8 12

46 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


Chapter 4.

IDP & DC Distribution Panel

4.1. INTRODUCTION
The C-DOT DSS MAX-XL utilizes a single supply potential of -48V DC as input for
all its power requirements. All AC and DC potential required for the operation of
the various cards in a frame of any cabinet and operation of VDU and Printers are
derived from this -48V DC source. In order to ensure a reliable and continuous
operation of MAX-XL, DC power distribution is carried out through two distribution
panels - Intermediate Distribution Panel (IDP) located in power room and DC
Distribution Panel (DCDP) in switch room.

4.2. LIST OF MATERIAL AND TOOLS REQUIRED


S.NO. DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

1. Intermediate Distribution Panel 1

2. DC Distribution Panel 2

3. Rawl Bolt 12

4. Drilling Machine 1

5. FBI Cards 2

6. Screws 8

4.3. INTERMEDIATE DISTRIBUTION PANEL (IDP)


The Intermediate Distribution Panel (refer Fig. 4.1) is used for terminating the 48V
DC supply which is originating from switching cubicle. It has a front cover which
can be opened by unlocking the two locks provided on it. Inside the IDP there are
two copper bus bars used for -48V and -48V GND, with a provision for terminating
the input cables from switching cubicle. The output cables to DCDP are taken
through a runway within the IDP.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 47
Chapter 4.

48 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


IDP & DC DISTRIBUTION PANEL

4.3.1. Mounting of IDP

IDP is installed in power room near to the switching cubicle at a distance of


about 5 mtrs from it. The size of IDP is 700x700x1700mm. It is to be mounted
by fixing the bottom frame assembly on the floor with four rawl bolts.

4.3.2. IDP Cabling

The interconnection from switching cubicle to IDP is either through bus bars
or maximum three pairs of PVC insulated cable of conductor cross section 240
sq. mm. crimped with a copper lugs on both the ends.
For extending the power from IDP to DCDP in the Switch Room, PVC
insulated cables of size 240 sq. mm is used. There is a provision for a
maximum of six pairs of cables, each pair used for -48V and -48V GND.
All these cables are explained in Chapter 10 and are connected as shown in
Fig. 10.7 (a).

4.4. DC DISTRIBUTION PANELS [DCDP'S]


Two number of DC Distribution Panels (refer Fig. 4.2) are used for distribution of -
48V to the suites (for more than 3 suites ), IOP-PDP, invertors, and an emergency
light through a MCB (Miniature Circuit Breaker ) protection mechanism. ONE
DCDP is sufficient for 3 number of full suites and IOP-PDP, inverters emergency
light etc.) Both are mounted on the floor. It has two slots on the top, one for entry of
the input cables from IDP [3 pair in copy-0 and 3 pair in copy-1], and the other for
the exit of cables. It has a front cover which can be opened by unlocking the two
locks provided on it. Inside the DCDP, there are two busbars coupled with each
other by another copper busbar. MCBs are mounted on these busbars for connecting
cables which extend the supply to suites - 120 amps, IOP-PDP - 30 Amps, Inverter -
30 Amps and Emergency light - 30 Amps. First busbar is used for supplying -48V
for copy 0 of the suites and second busbar is used for supplying -48V to copy 1 of the
suites. Below the -48V busbars is the -48V gnd busbar. It has provisions to
terminate cables both on the front as well as rear. -48V gnd cables for copy0 of the
suites can be terminated at the front side and copy1 cables can be terminated on the
rear. Below the -48V gnd busbar is a Digital gnd busbar and Chassis gnd busbar.
Each DCDP has a provision to house an FBI (Fuse Blown Indication) card to sense
the tripping of MCBs. The -48V busbar has a provision for DC supply to FBI card.
The FBI card has LEDs on it for indicating tripping of any MCB. They may be seen
through an acrylic sheet on the front of DCDP.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 49
Chapter 4.

50 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


IDP & DC DISTRIBUTION PANEL

4.4.1. Mounting of DCDPs

DCDP1 is installed in switch room close to the first suite. The distance
between DCDP1 and first suite should be less than 10 mtrs. The size of the
DCDPs is 700x800x1700 mm. It is to be mounted on the floor by fixing the
bottom frame assembly with four rawl bolts.
If the exchange requires more than 3 suites then DCDP2 is installed in
switch room close to fourth suite as shown in Fig. 1.4 switch room layout.
Internal details of DCDPs are shown in Fig. 4.3.

4.4.2. Mouting of FBI Cards on DCDP

As shown in Fig. 4.3, FBI card is mounted on each DCDP with four fixing
screws. -48V busbar of DCDP has a provision for DC supply to FBI card. For
sensing of MCB's failures on FBI, shorting stubs W21 to W28 and W31 to
W38 are to be shorted according to the MCB's used.

4.4.3. DCDPs Cabling

Cabling is done from IDP to DCDPs and DCDPs to individual suite PDPs,
IOP-PDP, invertors, emergency light etc as shown in Fig. 10.7 (b) and 10.7
(c). The cable assembly details are given in Chapter 10.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 51
Chapter 4.

52 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


Chapter 5.

Cabinet Installation

5.1. INTRODUCTION
This chapter gives details on unpacking, mounting and levelling a cabinet on a
Basemount. The material and tools required for the purpose along with the
procedure for ganging two cabinets is also explained.

5.2. MATERIAL & TOOLS REQUIRED

5.2.1. For Taking Out the Cabinet from Packing Case


S.NO. DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

1. Double End Spanner (17 & 18) (to remove 2


M10 Screw)

2. Pen Knife 1

5.2.2. For Mounting Castors on Cabinet and Moving it upto Basemount


S.NO. DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

1. Castor Block Assembly 4

(MAM-AXCBZ039-401)

2. Castor Cover Assembly 4


(MAM-AXCBZ040-301)

3. Socket Head Screw (M6.0 x 50.0) 8

4. Castor Guide Assembly 1

5. Castor Guide Plate 1

6. 5mm Allen Key for M6 Socket Head Screw 2

7. M6 Nut Driver 1

INSTALLATION MANUAL 53
Chapter 5.

5.2.3. For Levelling & Mounting the Cabinet on Basemount


S.NO. DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

1. Levelling rod 6 (MPM-AXCB2104-301) 1

2 Double End Spanner 24 & 25 (for M18 bolt)

3. Liner 4, MPI-WKSTZ138-401 3

4. Liner 5, MPI-WKSTZ139-401 3

5. Liner 6, MPI-WKSTZ140-401 3

6. Spirit Level 1

5.2.4. For Ganging the Cabinets (Two)


S.NO. DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

1. 5mm Allen Key (for M6 Socket Head 2


Screw)

2. Double End Spanner 12 & 13 (for M18 bolt) 1

3. Screw Drivers for M4 CSK and M8 CH 2


Head Screws

4. Ganging Panel 1
(MPM-AXCBZ098-201)

5. Ganging Member (Right) 2


(MPM-AXCBZ094-401)

6. Ganging Member (Left) 2


(MPM-AXCBZ095-401)

7. Ganging Bracket-2 2
(MPM-AXCBZ097-401)

8. Ganging Bracket – 1 2
(MPM-AXCBZ096-401)

9. CSK Head Screws M8.0 x 20.0 20

10. CHHD Screw M4.0 x 16.0 15

11. CSK Head Screw M4 x 10.0 15

5.3. UNPACKING CABINET


The first step involves taking out the cabinet from the packing case. A typical
reusable packing case for a single cabinet is shown in Fig. 5.1. Using double end
spanner size 17 & 18, all nuts/bolts are removed from the top and side panel of the
packing case. Semi-unpacked cabinet is shown in Fig. 5.2.

54 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABINET INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION MANUAL 55
Chapter 5.

56 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABINET INSTALLATION

5.4. CABINET ON CASTORS


The cabinet is made to lie on the floor and fitted with castors. Four castors are
attached in the area as shown in Fig. 5.3. Once the castors are fixed, cabinet is
brought to an upright position as shown in Fig. 5.3. Now the cabinet can be moved.

5.5. MOVING THE CABINET ON BASEMOUNT


Fig. 5.4 depicts the placement of castor guides over the Basemount. The castor
guide plates placed at suitable places serve for guiding the cabinet on to the
Basemount. The cabinet on castor is moved to position by gently pushing the
cabinet over the castor guide plate as shown in Fig. 5.5. Once the cabinet has
reached the top of the Basemount at the prescribed place, the castor guide plates
and castors are removed and the cabinet is made to rest on its four legs. For taking
out castors, levelling screw is rotated clock wise till castors are slightly lifted up.
Without any jerks to the cabinet it is taken out and made to rest on the Basemount.

5.6. LEVELLING/MOUNTING THE CABINET ON BASEMOUNT


The cabinet is made in level with other cabinet as well as on the Basemount using a
levelling rod as shown in Fig. 5.6. The levelling screw is made to rotate till the
cabinet is in level with other cabinets. While levelling, it is ensured that the cabinet
is not resting on Hexagonal levelling screw. With use of liners 4, 5 or 6, the cabinet
is rested on the Basemount.
The cabinet is now mounted on the Basemount using four M18 hexagonal head
screws and a M18 spanner. Refer detail B of Fig. 5.6 in Fig. 5.7 for levelling &
mounting of the cabinet. Depending on the position of the cabinet the respective
side panel is removed before fixing the cabinet on the Basemount.

5.7. GANGING THE CABINETS


After all the individual cabinets are levelled and mounted, ganging of the cabinets
is done.
Ganging is the process by which two adjacent cabinets are made into a single mass
by providing interlinking members. Ganging is extremely useful when the site is
subject to vibration and earthquakes.
A view of two cabinets ganged together is shown in Fig. 5.6. The ganging is
extended to all the cabinets. A detailed view of ganging is shown in Fig. 5.7.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 57
Chapter 5.

58 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABINET INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION MANUAL 59
Chapter 5.

60 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABINET INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION MANUAL 61
Chapter 5.

62 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


Chapter 6.

MDF Installation

6.1. INTRODUCTION
The MDF for Multi module exchange is quite different from that of SBM RAX
exchange. The SBM RAX MDF is wall mountable and requires little support from
floor. MBM MDF does not require any wall support and is fixed on the floor. This
should be installed near the cable chamber where the underground cables are
coming. A trench is provided in the cable chamber where these cables enter. These
underground cables are jelly filled cables. These cables can be terminated on the
line side of the MDF directly. But care should be taken that they are terminated on
backmount frames from bottom to top. If the jelly filled cables are not to be
terminated directly on the MDF then through a cable joint these cables can be
converted to switch board cables of 100 pair each. This jointing is done in the trench
provided in the cable chamber. The trench portion can then be covered with wooden
planks. This MDF is in the form of verticals having backmount frames on both
sides, one for exchange side and the other for line side. This MDF is supplied in
multiples of 5 verticals. The no. of verticals to be installed depends upon the line
capacity of the exchange. The width of the MDF is fixed whereas length depends
upon the number of verticals supplied.
Note : Installation of C-DOT designed MDF only is explained in brief in this
Chapter. In case it is other than C-DOT design the corresponding MDF
installation manual supplied alongwith the MDF shall be referred for
installation of the MDF.

6.2. MARKING
Suppose 10 verticals are to be installed. Draw a line at a distance of 200 mm from
the holes from where the cables will be leading in for termination on the verticals of
the MDF. The length of this line should be 2498 mm (10 verticals). Mark 4 points
at a distance of 260 mm, 1010 mm, 1509 mm, 2259 mm as shown in Fig. 6.1 (a).
These points are for fixing of expansion bolts.

6.3. MDF INSTALLATION


Make 4 holes at the marked points shown in Fig. 6.1 (b) of depth 90 mm at diameter
10 mm, Fix 4 expansion bolts (item 43) at these points. BTM section assy-5 (item 1)
is to be fixed with the help of expansion bolts.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 63
Chapter 6.

64 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


MDF INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION MANUAL 65
Chapter 6.

Fix Long prop. assy (item 4) on both ends of BTM section Assy-5 (item 1) with the
help of a Hex bolt (item 22) and lock washer (item 23). This is shown in detail C of
fig. 6.3. Now fix cable support assy (item 2) to the long prop. assy (item 4) using Hex
bolt (item 26), lock washer (item 27) Hex nut (item 28), lock washer (item 23) Fig.
6.2 (detail b). Now this support assy (item 3) is to be provided support at both ends.
For this fix leg (item 12) and Angle brace (item 13) with the help of Hex bolt (item
22) lock washer (item 23) and Hex nut (item 24). The brace angle is to be fixed to
the floor also with the help of expansion bolt (M6x65). So mark the drilling points.
Make the holes and fix the expansion bolts after drilling of holes. For this support
assy may have to be removed temporarily for drilling of holes. Refer Fig. 6.2 (detail
a). Short prop. assy (item 5) is to be fixed with BTM section assy - 5 (item 1) using
Hex bolt (item 22) lock washer (item 23) and Hex nut (item 24) as shown in Fig.
6.4 (detail e). Top ends of these three short prop. assy (item 5) are provided a
support by angle section-5 (item 8). This is fixed with long & short prop. assy using
Hex bolt (item 22) lock washer (item 23) and Hex nut (item 24) as shown in fig. 6.4.
Angle long (item 10) is to be fixed with cable support assy (item 2) and support assy
(item 3) using Hex bolt (item 26), lock washer (item 27) and Hex nut (item 28) as
shown in Fig. 6.5.
Cross member assy (item 6) passing through long prop. assy (item 4) is fixed onto
Angle long (item 10) using cheese head screw (item 29) lock washer (item 32) and
Hex nut (item 33).
Similarly cross member assy (item 6) passing through short prop. assy (item 5) is
fixed onto Angle short (item 9) using cheese head screw (item 29) lock washer
(item 32) and Hex nut (item 33). Refer fig. 6.6. Strip-5 (item 11) is to be joined with
cross member assy (item 6) using counter sunk screw. Similarly Horizontal Angle -
5 (item 14) is joined onto cross member assy (item 6) using counter sunk screw.
Refer fig. 6.7 (detail j).
Bent conduit -1 (item 17) and Bent conduit - 2 (item 18) are to be fixed onto conduit
- 4 (item 16) using hex bolt (item 25) and lock washer (item 27). Then this assembly
is joined onto support (item 3) using Hex bolt (item 26) and lock washer (item 27),
Refer Fig. 6.8. Top angle section - 5 (item 21) and clamp (item 20) are to be fixed
onto long prop assy (item 4) using Hex bolt (item 26), lock washer (item 27) and Hex
nut (item 28) as shown in Fig. 6.9.
Backmount frame - 11 is fixed onto Angle short (item 9) and Angle Long (item 10)
using cheese head screw, lock washer and Hex nut. Backmount frame - 9 is fixed
onto horizontal angle - 5 (item 14) with the help of cheese head screw, lock washer
and Hex nut.
For expanding MDF capacity, another similar structure for 5 verticals is to be
added using Fish plate - 1 (item 9) and Fish Plate-2 (item 17).

66 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


MDF INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION MANUAL 67
Chapter 6.

68 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


MDF INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION MANUAL 69
Chapter 6.

70 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


MDF INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION MANUAL 71
Chapter 6.

72 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


MDF INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION MANUAL 73
Chapter 6.

74 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


MDF INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION MANUAL 75
Chapter 6.

Part List of Material for 10 Verticals


Sl. NO. CDOT PART CODE DESCRIPTION QTY.

1. MAM-DFLSA105-301 BTM Channel Assy-5 (75x40x5x1249) 2

2. MAM-DFLSA111-301 Cable Support Assy 40x40x5x930 3

3. MAM-DFLSA112-301 Support Assy-L 50x50x5x1180 3

4. MAM-DFLSA121-101 Long Prop. Ang. Assy 50x50x5x3460 3

5. MAM-DFLSA124-101 Short Prop.Ang. Assy 50x50x5x3300 7

6. MAM-DFLSA131-301 Cross-Member Assy 12.5x12.5x808 110

7. MPM-DFMPA002-401 Fish Plate-1 M.S. Flat 70x30x5 (for extensions) 11

8. MPM-DFMPA005-301 Angle Section-5 M.S Angle 35x35x5x1248. 2

9. MPM-DFLPA006-301 Angle Short M.S. Angle 35x35x5x3160 7

10. MPM-DFLPA007-301 Angle Long M.S. Angle 35x35x5x3183 3

11. MPM-DFLPA010-401 Strip-5 M.S. Flat 20x4x1240 22

12. MPM-DFMPA011-401 Leg. M.S. Angle 50x50x5x210 6

13. MPM-DFMPA012-401 Angle Brace, M.S. Angle 50x34x5 6

14. MPM-DFMPA015-201 Horizontal Angle-5 M.S. Angle 35x35x4x1250 22

15. MPM-DFMPA016-401 Fish Plate-2 M.S. Flat 60x25x5 11

16. MPM-DFMPA020-401 Conduit-4 Al tube 030x2x998 4

17. MPM-DFMPA021-301 Bent-conduit-1 Al. Tube 030x2 THK 2

18. MPM-DFMPA022-301 Bent-conduit-2 Al. Tube 030x2 THK 2

19. MPM-DFMPA023-401 Bolt M.S. Rod-025x84 10

20. MPM-DFLPA024-401 Clamp-L M.S. Sheet 2.5mm 3

21. MPM-DFLPA037-301 Angle Top-L 2

22. MCS-HESTM010-401 SCR Hex STL, M10x20 64

23. MCW-LKPB0008-401 Lock Washer M10 88

24. MCN-HESSM009-401 Hex nut M10 24

25. MCS-HESTM003-401 Hex bolt M8x25 24

26 MCS-HESTM002-401 Hex bolt M8x20 32

27. MCW-LKPB0007-401 Lock Washer M8 84

28. MCN-HESSM008-401 Hex Nut M8 40

76 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


MDF INSTALLATION

Sl. NO. CDOT PART CODE DESCRIPTION QTY.

29. MCS-CHSSM047-401 Cheese Head Screw M5x25 220

30. MCS-CHSSM045-401 Cheese Head Screw M5x16 224

31. MCS-CHSSM044-401 Cheese Head Screw M5x12 440

32. MCW-LKPB0005-401 Lock Washer 5.1x9 1544

33. MCN-HESSM006-401 Hex Nut M5 660

34. MCG-EBMIA002-401 Expansion Bolt M10x90 4

35. MCC-MDFPZ0042-301 Back Mount Frame-9 (2/8 pair) 100

36. MCC-MDFPZ045-301 Back Mount Frame-11 (2/10 pair) 100

37. MPM-DFMPA501-301 Earth Strip 10

38. MPM-DFMPA505-301 Earth Bar – 4 2

39. MCS-HESTM005-401 SCR HEX STL-M8X40 10

40. MPM-DFLPA500-301 Test Jack Flat 2

41. MCG-EBMIA001-401 *Expansion Bolt - M6x65 8

42. MCS-CSSSZ057-401 SCR CSK SST-M5x12 110

43. MPM-DFMPA016-401 Conduit-1 --

44. MPM-DFMPA222-401 Strip-2 --

45. MPM-DFMPA053-401 Fish Plate --

46. MPM-DFMPA052-401 Angle Top 5+2 --

47. MPM-DFMPA215-301 Horizontal Angle-2 --

48. MAM-DFLSA102-301 BTM Channel Assy-2 --

49. MPM-DFMPA002-301 Angle Section-2 --

50. MPM-DFMPA502-301 Earth Bar-1 --

51. MCC-MDFPZ053-401 Label Holders with labels (2/10) 100

52. MCC-MDFPZ054-401 Label Holders with labels (2/8) 100

53. Grommets for Back Mount 1100


Frame – 11 (2/10) pair

54. Grommets for Back Mount 1100


Frame – 9 (2/8) pair

INSTALLATION MANUAL 77
Chapter 7.

IOP & ADP Installation

7.1. INTRODUCTION
IOPs are placed in IOP Room as per the layout discussed in Fig. 1.5. The cabinet of
IOP is not fixed on the floors. The cabinet of IOP is shown in Fig. 7.1 (a). VDU
Terminals are connected to IOP for issuing commands and printer is connected to
IOP for hard copy output.
The alarm display panel is a unit which is connected to the Central Module by
means of HDLC link cable. The system is powered by tapping -48V DC supply from
the IOP Power Distribution Panel (IOP PDP) which is located in the IOP Room.
ADP is placed in Operation and Maintenance Control (OMC) Room at convenient
location (height of eye-level) on a table so that the alarm is audible/visible to the
operator. The alarms can be acknowledged by the operator by pressing the switch
`ACKNOWLEDGE' provided on the front panel of the ADP (Fig. 7.2 (a )).

7.2. IOP INSTALLATION


IOP installation consists of various steps line unpacking, cabinet placement, visual
checks, cabling etc.

7.2.1. Material & Tools Required


• IOP Cabinet
• Measuring Tape
• Pencil

7.2.2. Unpacking IOP

The cabinet is to be taken out of wooden casing by removing the nuts/bolts.

7.2.3. IOP Cabinet Placement

It is ensured that the floor marking in IOP Room is done as per the Fig. 1.4
for the physical placement of IOP racks. Next, the IOPs are carefully placed
at the marked location.

78 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


IOP & ADP INSTALLATION

7.2.4. IOP - Visual Checks

The top cover of IOP cabinet is removed and check that all internal cables are
terminated at their proper positions. It is also ensured that the connectors
are tight and are latched properly.
Visual check is made of glass fuse and ensure that it is mounted in fuse
holder near shell connector of IOP. The rating of fuse should be 6.3 amps.
The packing material (paper) inserted in the cartridge drive for protection
during transportation is removed and it is ensured that there is no damage to
drives and front panel. The front view and rear view of IOP-VH are shown in
Fig. 7.1 (a) and 7.1 (b) respectively.

7.2.5. IOP - CABLING

IOP basically requires four types of cables to be connected. They are `IOP -
Power Cable', ‘IOP - Terminal Cable’, ‘IOP - Printer Cable’ and IOP-HDLC
link cables. Details on these cables are given in chapter 10, sec 10.5.23,
10.6.5, 10.6.6, 10.6.1 and 10.6.2 respectively.

7.3. MM-ADP INSTALLATION


The ADP is placed on a table in the OMC room. It is to be ensured that the rear
panel of the unit has enough clearance from the wall so that power and signal
cables can be easily terminated on the rear panel.

7.3.1. Material and Tools Required


• Alarm Display Panel
• Table for the Alarm Display Panel

7.3.2. Unpacking - MM-ADP

The panel is taken out of the wooden casing by removing the front cover.

7.3.3. MM-ADP - Visual Checks

After unpacking of the unit it is carefully examined for any breakage in the
acrylic sheet and LEDs. Check that all the keys mounted on the front panel
of ADP are not damaged i.e. permanently jammed or broken. The RESET and
ON/OFF switch mounted at the rear of the ADP are also checked for proper
functioning. The front view and rear view of MM ADP are shown in Fig. 7.2
(a) and 7.2 (b) respectively.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 79
Chapter 7.

7.3.4. MM-ADP Cabling

One 11 pair cable from the High Performance Administrative Processor Unit
(HPU) of the Central Module which connects both copies of AP to the ADP is
laid. This cable placement detail is given in Chapter 10, Section 10.6.3. For
terminations at the ADP end, a 25 pin D-Type female connector is used and
at the HPU end it is two 7/2 IDC connector (enclosed in a hood).
For -48V DC supply, a 4 core single cable is connected from IOP PDP through
an MCB of 2A to the rear panel of ADP. 2 Cores of this cable are used for -
48V and 2 cores for ground. Cable details are given in Chapter 10, Section
10.5.24 on cable laying. Use Red and Yellow/Green core for ground and Blue
and Yellow for -48V.

80 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


IOP & ADP INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION MANUAL 81
Chapter 7.

82 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


IOP & ADP INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION MANUAL 83
Chapter 7.

84 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


Chapter 8.

Power Distribution Panel and its FBI


Mounting

8.1. INTRODUCTION
Power Distribution Panel (PDP) forms a part of Vertical Pillar Assembly in the Iron
work as shown in Fig. 8.1. PDP is used for further distributing -48V and -48V gnd to
the eight cabinets in the suite. One PDP is present in each suite. -48V is distributed
to cabinets through MCBs/Fuses which are mounted on the PDP. The indication of
the blowing of fuses/tripping of MCBs is given on Fuse Blown Indicator Card (FBI),
which is mounted on PDP. This chapter gives details regarding PDP installation
and mounting of FBI card on PDP and setting of shorting stubs on it.

8.2. PDP INSTALLATION


As this forms a part of Iron work, no separate unpacking and installation are
required.

8.2.1. Visual Check

It is ensured that
• All copper bars are mounted firmly,
• The fuse blocks have screws for mounting the wires,
• All the wire clamps are there,
• All the fuse holder and fuses are there and are properly fixed. The number
of fuses will depend on the configuration of the site.

8.2.2. DP FUSE PLACEMENT

The distribution of -48 volts supply from DCDP to the cabinets in suite is
done through Fuses/MCBs mounted on the PDP. Each copy of a cabinet gets
supply through an independent Fuse/MCB. The Table 8.1 mentions the
power distribution. Fig. 8.2 shows the Fuse/MCB placement.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 85
Chapter 8.

8.3. MOUNTING OF FBI CARD


The FBI card (Fuse blown indicator) is generally mounted on the vertical pillar of
the PDP.

8.3.1. Material & Tools Required


S.No. Materials & Tools Required Qty.

1. FBI Card 1

2. Shorting stubs 50

3. Screw-driver 1

2. Screws 4

8.3.2. Visual Check

It is ensured that no damage is occurred to LEDs and reset switches are not
stuck.

8.3.3. FBI Card Mounting on PDP

FBI card is mounted on PDP of each suite as shown in Fig. 8.2 using four
screws.

8.3.4. FBI Card Cabling & Shorting Stubs Setting

Details of connections between FBI card pins and various locations from the
suites are described in the FBI card block diagram (Fig. 8.3). From copy 0
and copy 1 of -48V GND busbars two signal cables are connected to J37 and
J39 pins respectively of the FBI card mounted on PDP. Similarly FBI card
gets the -48V in pins J41 and J43 from copy 0 -48V and copy 1 -48V busbars
respectively. Fuses F1, F3, F5, F7, F9, F11, F13 and F15 mounted on suite
PDP are connected with copy 0 -48V busbar. Power cables from F1, F3, F5,
F7, F9, F11, F13 & F15 are connected to the pins J1, J3, J5, J7, J9, J11, J13
& J15 respectively of FBI card. Similarly pins J2, J4, J6, J8 J10, J12, J14 &
J16 of FBI card are to be connected with fuses F2, F4, F6, F8, F10, F12, F14
and F16 respectively, which are connected with copy 1 -48V busbar.
Filter box sensing cables coming from cabinet-1, cabinet-2, .... Cabinet-8 are
to be connected to FBI card pin nos J21, J22 ..... J28 respectively.
FBI cards mounted on suite PDPs, DCDPs and IOP-PDP are daisy-chained to
extend alarm signal generated in the system to OMA panel (Described later
in Section 9.3.3).

86 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL AND ITS FBI MOUNTING

TABLE 8.1
Fuse No. Fuse Rating Amps. Equipment Connected

F1 16 Cabinet-No 1 (BM/LM) Copy-0

F2 16 Cabinet-No 1 (BM/LM) Copy-1

F3 16 Cabinet-No 2 (BM/LM) Copy-0

F4 16 Cabinet-No 2 (BM/LM) Copy-1

F5 16 Cabinet-No 3 (BM/LM) Copy-0

F6 16 Cabinet-No 3 (BM/LM) Copy-1

F7 16 Cabinet-No 4 (BM/LM) Copy-0

F8 16 Cabinet-No 4 (BM/LM) Copy-1

F9 16 Cabinet-No 5 (BM/LM) Copy-0

F10 16 Cabinet-No 5 (BM/LM) Copy-1

F11 16 Cabinet-No 6 (BM/LM) Copy-0

F12 16 Cabinet-No 6 (BM/LM) Copy-1

F13 16 Cabinet-No 7 (BM/LM) Copy-0

F14 16 Cabinet-No 7 (BM/LM) Copy-1

F15 16 Cabinet-No 8 (BM/LM) Copy-0

F16 16 Cabinet-No 8 (BM/LM) Copy-1

F17 -

F18 -

F19 2 FBI Copy-0

F20 2 FBI Copy-1

Note : In case of CM cabinet the Fuse rating (i.e. F5 & F6) is 36 Amps.
For enabling the fuse blow indication some points are to be shorted with help
of shorting stubs. If these points are not shorted then the fuse blown
indication will not come. For indicating blown fuse of -48V supply to the
cabinet (copy 0 & copy 1) and filter boxes of the cabinet, four points have to
be shorted. These points are mentioned on per cabinet basis in the table
below. W`xx' indicates the position of the shorting points on the FBI cards. A
switch of FBI card is provided to enable the extension of blown fuse to
Operation & Maintenance Alarm Box. After installation, this switch should
be kept upwords to enable the OMA alarm. The same steps mentioned above

INSTALLATION MANUAL 87
Chapter 8.

have to be repeated for each suite in a multiple suite exchange configuration.


These details are available in Tables 8.2 to 8.9.
TABLE 8.2
SL. No. W21 W31 W1 W2 STATE
1. Short Short Short Short Fuse F1 sensing enabled Fuse F2 sensing
enabled Filter box fuse sensing enabled for
cabinet no 1.

TABLE 8.3
SL. No. W22 W32 W3 W4 STATE
1. Short Short Short Short Fuse F3 sensing enabled Fuse F4 sensing
enabled Filter box fuse sensing enabled for
cabinet no 2.

TABLE 8.4
SL. No. W23 W33 W5 W6 STATE
1. Short Short Short Short Fuse F5 sensing enabled Fuse F6 sensing
enabled Filter box fuse sensing enabled for
cabinet no 3.

TABLE 8.5
SL. No. W24 W34 W7 W8 STATE

1. Short Short Short Short Fuse F7 sensing enabled Fuse F8 sensing


enabled Filter box fuse sensing enabled for
cabinet no 4.

TABLE 8.6
SL. No. W25 W35 W9 W10 STATE
1. Short Short Short Short Fuse F9 sensing enabled Fuse F10 sensing
enabled Filter box fuse sensing enabled for
cabinet no. 5

TABLE 8.7
SL. No. W26 W36 W11 W12 STATE
1. Short Short Short Short Fuse F11 sensing enabled Fuse F12 sensing
enabled Filter box fuse sensing enable for
cabinet no 6.

TABLE 8.8
SL. No. W27 W37 W13 W14 STATE

1. Short Short Short Short Fuse F13 sensing enabled Fuse F14 sensing
enabled Filter box fuse sensing enabled for
cabinet no 7.

88 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL AND ITS FBI MOUNTING

TABLE 8.9
SL. No. W28 W38 W15 W16 STATE

1. Short Short Short Short Fuse F15 sensing enabled Fuse F16 sensing
enabled Filter box fuse sensing enabled for
cabinet no 8.

Three error cables are coming out from the CM cabinet and are all
terminated on FBI card. They are :
1. Copy 0 filter box and child card daisy chained error cable (coming out
as ER44).
2. Copy 1 filter box and child card daisy chaired error cable (coming out
as ER45).
3. Fan fail error (both copy 0 and copy 1) daisy chained (coming out as
ER46), which is coming from top hat of the cabinet.) (To access we have
to remove the top hat). All the above cables end in mate-n-lock
connectors thus compatible with earlier MAX-L version of connectors
used.
These three error cables are terminated on FBI card. One of them (fan
fail error cable) will go to the usual rack position for third cabinet J23.
Copy 0 filter box and child card daisy chained cable will terminate on
J29 and copy-1 filter box and child card daisy chained cable will
terminate on J30 position of the FBI card. Shorting stubs position
required for enabling alarms from J29 and J30 are given in table 8.10
and 8.11 respectively.
TABLE 8.10
SL. No. W17 W18 W29 W39

1. SHORT SHORT OPEN SHORT

TABLE 8.11
SL. No. W19 W20 W30 W40

1. SHORT SHORT OPEN SHORT

INSTALLATION MANUAL 89
Chapter 8.

90 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL AND ITS FBI MOUNTING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 91
Chapter 9.

IOP - PDP and OMA Installation

9.1. INTRODUCTION
This is a Power Distribution Panel for Input Output Processor (IOP), Alarm Display
Panel (ADP), Operation & Maintenance Alarm (OMA), Smoke Detector etc. The
isometric view of IOP-PDP is given in Fig. 9.1. It has four busbars for -48V, -48V
gnd, Digital ground and Chassis ground as shown in Fig. 9.2. Input to these busbars
is coming from DCDP1 for further distribution. It has 3 shell connectors for
supplying power to two IOPs and one ADP. Supply to these units is given through
MCB as shown in Fig. 9.2. A tag block has been provided to give supply to OMA,
Smoke detector etc. For these supplies, no fuse protection has been provided. A mini
busbar has been provided for distribution to these units. Input for this busbar is
also coming from DCDP. Internally connections have been provided between mini
busbar and the tag block. Similarly internal connections have been provided
between ground busbar and the tag block. On the top of the IOP-PDP, Fuse Blown
Indicator (FBI) card is mounted. The function of this card is to sense the presence
of -48V supply to IOPs and ADP. In case of failure of -48V supply to IOPs and ADP,
alarm signal will be extended by this card to OMA and will be displayed on FBI
card itself through an LED. This FBI card is covered with an acrylic sheet through
which the LEDs are visible.

9.2. INSTALLATION OF IOP-PDP


The installation of this unit is very simple. It should be installed very near to the
+actual placement of the IOPs. This distance should be as small as possible so as to
minimise the DC voltage drop in the cable from IOP-PDP to the IOP. It is to be
installed on the floor itself at the position indicated in IOP room as shown in Fig.
1.5. Two rawl bolts are fixed on the floor to hold the PDP. A cut has been provided
on the bottom of the PDP for fixing it with the rawl bolt.

9.2.1. FBI Card Mounting on IOP-PDP

FBI card is to be mounted on IOP-PDP for sensing fuse failure in IOP and
ADP. This FBI card extends alarm signal to the OMA panel assembly for
audio-visual display in case of any power failure in IOP & ADP. This card is

INSTALLATION MANUAL 92
IOP - PDP AND OMA INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION MANUAL 93
Chapter 9.

94 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


IOP - PDP AND OMA INSTALLATION

in daisy- chain with FBI cards of suite PDPs and DCDP. W21 to W23 and
W31 to W33 are to be shorted on FBI card according to MCBs used.

9.2.2. IOP-PDP Cabling

This is to be done as shown in Fig. 10.1 (c)

9.3. OMA PANEL ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION


OMA panel assembly is to be installed in OMC room to provide audio & visual
indications in the event of any power failure in Power Room, Switch Room, IOP
Room and Invertors. This facilitates exchange maintenance staff for its corrective
action. Here installation procedure of OMA panel assembly and cabling is
explained.

9.3.1. Material & Tools Required


S.NO. Material & Tools required Qty.

1. OMA 1

2. Screws 4

3. Wooden Plugs 4

4. Rubber Grommets 4

5. Drilling Machine 1

6. Screw-Driver 1

9.3.2. OMA Mounting

The OMA panel is wall mountable. The front cover of OMA panel is opened
with the help of four screws provided as shown in Fig. 9.3. Two holes are
provided on the rear side of the panel for fixing on the wall. With the help of
screws and wooden plugs the OMA panel is fixed on the wall. Another two
holes are provided to access mounting screws for tightening the screws from
the front. These holes are plugged with rubber grommets after tightening the
screws.
Whenever any fault occurs in power plant or in any of the inverters or in
switching equipments, it gets -48V GND to raise audio-visual alarm. Cables
coming from the two inverters, power plant room and IOP-PDP (FBI card
J32) are terminated on the terminal block TB1 of OMA panel. Details of
connections in OMA TB1 as per as follows:-

INSTALLATION MANUAL 95
Chapter 9.

96 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


IOP - PDP AND OMA INSTALLATION

Cable from Terminal block Remarks


TB1 pin no.

Inverter 1 3 Invertor Alarm

Inverter 2 4 Invertor Alarm

OMA Point 1 of IOP-PDP 5 -48V

OMA Point 2 of IOP-PDP 6 Gnd

IOP-PDP FBI Point 1 Switch Room Alarm

Power plant (Switching cubicle) 2 Power Room Alarm

9.3.3. OMA-Daisy Chaining

Alarm signals of Power failures in switching equipments like various suite


PDPs, IOP-PDP and DCDPs are daisy chained. Finally J32 pin of IOP-PDP
FBI card extends alarm which is basically - 48V GND signal to terminal
block TB1 of OMA panel (refer Fig. 9.4).

INSTALLATION MANUAL 97
Chapter 9.

98 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


Chapter 10.

Cable Preparation and Laying

10.1. INTRODUCTION
In this chapter preparation of various types of cables at site are discussed. Certain
cables are prepared in the factory for which the length is known. Following type of
cables which need to be prepared at site are covered in this chapter :
i) Ground cables,
ii) DC cables,
iii) Signal cables,
iv) MDF cables.

10.2. CRIMPING PROCEDURE


Most of the cables used are provided with a copper lug at both ends for termination.
These lugs are crimped to the cable with a proper crimping tool. Similarly
subscriber cables, trunk cables, & signal cables require crimping of their individual
wires on a connector which is of IDC type. This requires a special crimping tool
other than the one mentioned above. The crimping tools used for crimping of
Ground & DC Cables and Signal & MDF Cables are given with the description of
each cable.

99 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


Chapter 10.

10.3. CABLE PREPARATION


For the preparation of cables, all details required are made available in the
following standard format :
CDOT ASSY NO : This is the number given to an assembled cable
with both source and destination termination
arrangements done.

DRAWING NO. : This is the drawing number which can be


referred for the assembly of the cable.

CABLE PART NO. : This number gives the type of cable used.

CABLE MARKER NO. : This number is given to the cable which gives
an identity to the cable.

CABLE SPECIFICATION : Self explanatory

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : Self explanatory

CABLE LENGTH : Self explanatory

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : This number gives the detail of the termination
arrangement used at the source point.

DESTINATION TERMINATION PART : This number gives the detail of the termination
NO. arrangement used at the terminating point.

SOURCE PLACEMENT : This gives the place detail from where the cable
will start.

DESTINATION PLACEMENT : This gives the place detail where the cable will
be terminated.

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : This gives information about the tool to be used


for crimping of lugs etc., at source and
destination for assembling the cable.

The cables having common parameters are grouped together in Tabular form.

10.4. GROUND CABLES


Ground cables are laid from Earth collector plate to various equipments like
switching cubicle in Power room, MDF, DCDPs, IDP, antistatic flooring etc. This is
represented with the help of a block diagram in Fig. 10.1 (a). Similarly laying of
ground cables from DCDPs to Power distribution panels of all suites and from there
to individual cabinets is shown in Fig. 10.1 (b). However detail of each cable is given
below.

100 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 101


Chapter 10.

102 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

10.4.1. Detail of Cables from Earth Collector Plate

10.4.1.1.
CDOT ASSY NO : ACB-MAXLGXXX-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG 10.2

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSCP56-401


or BTC wire 19/1.8mm2

CABLE MARKER NO. : GXXX

CABLE SPECIFICATION : Power cable Single core 240mm2

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : Black

CABLE LENGTH : To suite site requirement

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCT-ERTCH014-401 300mm2 –


Terminal Tube

DESTINATION TERMINATION NO. : MCT-ERTCH014-401 300mm2 –


Terminal Tube

SOURCE : As per Table 10.1

DESTINATION : As per Table 10.1

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Crimping tool SYD - 20


Die to be used JDD-11

Note :
XXX takes different values as depicted in Table 10.1.
Refer Fig. 10.1 (a) for block diagrams.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 103


Chapter 10.

104 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

10.4.1.2.
CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXLGXXX-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.3

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSCP48-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : GXXX

CABLE SPECIFICATION : Power cable, Single core 25mm2

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : Black

CABLE LENGTH : To suite site requirement

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCT-ERRIN310-401 25mm2 -


Ring Terminal Crimp Type

DESTINATION TERMINATION NO. : MCT-ERRIN310-401 25mm2 -


Ring Terminal Crimp Type

SOURCE : As per Table 10.1

DESTINATION : As per Table 10.1

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Crimping tool SYB-95. Die to be used JBR-5

Note :
XXX takes different values depicted in Table 10.1.
Refer Fig. 10.1 (a) for connections.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 105


Chapter 10.

106 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

TABLE 10.1
SL. C-DOT ASSY NO DRAWING FROM TO SIZE CABLE
No. NO. MARKER

1.# ACB-MAXLGEM1-000 FIG. 10.2 Earth Pit Earth #240mm2 GEM1


Collector Plate

2. ACB-MAXLGDS1-000 FIG. 10.2 Earth Collector Plate DCDP1 digital 240mm2 GDS1
ground bus bar

3. ACB-MAXLGDS2-000 FIG. 10.2 Earth Collector Plate DCDP2 Digital 240mm2 GDS2
ground bus bar

4. ACB-MAXLGR01-000 FIG. 10.2 Earth Collector Plate Switching 240mm2 GR01


Cubicle-48V
Gnd Bus Bar

5. *ACB-MAXLGM01-000 FIG. 10.3 Earth Collector Plate MDF (Lines) 25mm2 GMO1

6. ACB-MAXLGM02-000 FIG. 10.3 Earth Collector Plate MDF (Trunks) 25mm2 GMO2

7. ACB-MAXLGMP1-000 FIG. 10.3 Earth Collector Plate MDF (PCM) 25mm2 GMP1

8. ACB-MAXLGCD1-000 FIG. 10.3 Earth Collector Plate DCDP1 25mm2 GCD1


Chassis
ground bus-bar

9. ACB-MAXLGCD2-000 FIG. 10.3 Earth Collector Plate DCDP2 25mm2 GCD2


Chassis
ground bus-bar

10. ACB-MAXLGCI1-000 FIG. 10.3 Earth Collector Plate IDP chassis 25mm2 GCI1

Note :
# Instead of 240mm2 cables BTC wire (19/1.8mm2) can be used.
* There will be two such cables running between Earth collector plate
and MDF (lines).

INSTALLATION MANUAL 107


Chapter 10.

10.4.1.3.
CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXLGA01-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.4

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSCP46-40

CABLE MARKER NO. : GA01

CABLE SPECIFICATION : Power cable, Single core 10mm2

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : Black

CABLE LENGTH : Site dependent

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCT-ERRIN200-401

DESTINATION TERMINATION NO. : MCT-ERRIN200-401

SOURCE : Earth collector plate

DESTINATION : Antistatic flooring

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Crimping tool SYB-95 Die to be used JBR-1

Note :
1. For earthing the antistatic material a copper strip is fastened/rivetted
on bottom side of antistatic material. This strip is earthed through a
cable with 1M ohm/5W resistor.
2. If IOP and switch room antistatic flooring is not shorted through
copper strip, then two separate cables are required from earth plate for
earthing IOP and switch room floor.
Refer Fig. 10.1 (a) for connections.

108 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 109


Chapter 10.

10.4.1.4.
CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXLGCA1-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.5

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSCP48-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : GCA1

CABLE SPECIFICATION : Power cable Single core 25mm2

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : Black

CABLE LENGTH : Site dependent

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCT-ERRIN310-401 25mm2 -


Ring Terminal crimp type

DESTINATION TERMINATION NO. : Stripped wire (soldered)

SOURCE : Earth Collector Plate

DESTINATION : Cable shield

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Crimping tool SYB - 95 Die to be used JBR-5

Refer Fig. 10.1 (a) for connections.

110 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 111


Chapter 10.

10.4.2. Details of Digital & Chassis Ground Cable From DCDP to PDP/IOP-
PDP/DCDP Chassis
CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXLGXXX-000

DRAWING NO. : Fig. 10.6

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSCP48-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : GXXX

CABLE SPECIFICATION : Power cable, Single core 25mm2

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : Black

CABLE LENGTH : Site dependent

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCT-ERRIN310-401 25mm2 -


Ring Terminal Crimp type

DESTINATION TERMINATION NO. : MCT-ERRIN310-401 25mm2 -


Ring Terminal Crimp type

SOURCE : As per Table 10.2

DESTINATION : As per Table 10.2

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Crimping tool SYB-95 Die to be used JBR-5

Note :
XXX takes values as per Table 10.2.
Refer Fig. 10.1 (a) for connections.

112 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 113


Chapter 10.

Table 10.2
SL. C-DOT ASSY NO DRAWING FROM TO SIZE CABLE
No. NO. MARKER

1. ACB-MAXLGDP1-000 Fig. 10.6 DCDP1 Digital GND PDP Digital 25mm2 GDP1
Bus Bar GND Bus Bar
(Suite 1)

2. ACB-MAXLGDP2-000 Fig. 10.6 DCDP1 Digital GND PDP Digital 25mm2 GDP2
Bus Bar GND Bus Bar
(Suite 2)

3. ACB-MAXLGDP3-000 Fig. 10.6 DCDP1 Digital GND PDP Digital 25mm2 GDP3
Bus Bar GND Bus Bar
(Suite 3)

4. ACB-MAXLGDIP-000 Fig. 10.6 DCDP1 Digital GND IOP-PDP 25mm2 GDIP


Bus Bar Digital GND
Bus Bar

5. ACB-MAXLGDP4-000 Fig. 10.6 DCDP2 Digital GND PDP Digital 25mm2 GDP4
Bus Bar GND Bus Bar
(Suite 4)

6. ACB-MAXLGDP5-000 Fig. 10.6 DCDP2 Digital GND PDP Digital 25mm2 GDP5
Bus Bar GND Bus Bar
(Suite 5)

7. ACB-MAXLGCP1-000 Fig. 10.6 DCDP1 Chassis GND PDP Chassis 25mm2 GCP1
Bus Bar GND Bus Bar
(Suite 1)

8. ACB-MAXLGCP2-000 Fig. 10.6 DCDP1 Chassis PDP Chassis 25mm2 GCP2


GND Bus Bar GND Bus Bar
(Suite 2)

9. ACB-MAXLGCP3-000 Fig. 10.6 DCDP1 Chassis PDP Chassis 25mm2 GCP3


GND Bus Bar GND Bus Bar
(Suite 3)

10. ACB-MAXLGCIP-000 Fig. 10.6 DCDP1 chassis IOP-PDP 25mm2 GCIP


GND Bus Bar chassis GND
Bus Bar

11. ACB-MAXLGCP4-000 Fig. 10.6 DCDP2 Chassis PDP Chassis 25mm2 GCP4
GND Bus Bar GND Bus Bar
(Suite 4)

12. ACB-MAXLGCP5-000 Fig. 10.6 DCDP2 Chassis PDP Chassis 25mm2 GCP5
GND Bus Bar GND Bus Bar
(Suite 5)

13. ACB-MAXLGCC1-000 Fig. 10.6 DCDP1 Chassis DCDP1 25mm2 GCC1


GND Bus Bar Chassis

14. ACB-MAXLGCC2-000 Fig. 10.6 DCDP2 Chassis DCDP2 25mm2 GCC2


GND Bus Bar Chassis

114 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

10.5. DC CABLES
Fig. 10.7 (a), Fig. 10.7 (b), Fig. 10.7 (c) and Fig. 10.7 (d) show Block Diagram of DC
Power Cables.

10.5.1. Details of -48V & -48V GND DC Cable from Switching Cubicle to IDP
CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXLPPSI-000 (Blue)
ACB-MAXLPGSI-000 (Red)

DRAWING NO. : Fig. 10.8

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSCP36-401 (Blue)


MCA-PVCSCP16-401 (Red)

CABLE MARKER NO. : PPSI (Blue) PGSI (Red)

CABLE SPECIFICATION : Power cable, Single core 240mm2

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : Blue & Red

CABLE LENGTH : Site dependent

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCT-ERTCH014-401 300mm2 -


Cu Tube Terminal Crimp Type

DESTINATION TERMINATION NO. : MCT-ERTCH014-401 300mm2 -


Cu Tube Terminal Crimp Type

SOURCE : Switching Cubicles

DESTINATION : IDP

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Crimping tool SYD-20


Die to be used JDD-11

Note :
Three such cables (blue) for -48V and three (Red) for -48V GND will run
parallely from switching cubicle to IDP. See Fig. 10.7 (a).
OR
Two bus bars of size 100x10 mm will run parallely from switching cubicle to
IDP, each bus bar is for -48 V and -48 V GND.
Refer Fig. 10.7 (a) for block diagram.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 115


Chapter 10.

116 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 117


Chapter 10.

118 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 119


Chapter 10.

120 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

10.5.2. Detail of -48V and -48V GND DC Cables from IDP to DCDP
CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXLPPDX-000 (Blue)
ACB-MAXLPGDX-000 (Red)

DRAWING NO. : Fig. 10.9

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSCP36-401 (Blue)


MCA-PVCSCP16-401 (Red)

CABLE MARKER NO. : PPDX (Blue) PGDX (Red)

CABLE SPECIFICATION : Power cable, Single core 240mm2

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : As per Table 10.3

CABLE LENGTH : Site dependent

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCT-ERTCH014-401 300mm2 -


Terminal Tube

DESTINATION TERMINATION NO. : MCT-ERTCH014-401 300mm2 -


Terminal Tube

SOURCE : As per Table 10.3

DESTINATION : As per Table 10.3

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Crimping tool SYD-20 Die to be used JDD-11

Note :
1. There can be maximum of six such cable pairs going from IDP to
DCDPs. The actual number of cables to be used will depend upon the
number of suites installed.
2. X takes values 1 and 2 for DCDP1 and DCDP2 respectively.
Refer Fig. 10.7 (a) for block diagrams.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 121


Chapter 10.

122 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

Table 10.3
SL. C-DOT ASSY NO DRAWING FROM TO SIZE CABLE COLOUR
No. NO. MARKER

1. ACB-MAXLPPD1-000 Fig. 10.9 IDP -48V busbar DCDP1 -48V 240mm2 PPD1 Blue
busbar

2. ACB-MALPPD2-000 Fig. 10.9 IDP -48V busbar DCDP2 -48V 240mm2 PPD2 Blue
busbar

3. ACB-MAXLPGD1-000 Fig. 10.9 IDP -48V GND DCDP1 -48V 240mm2 PGD1 Red
busbar GND busbar

4. ACB-MAXLPGD2-000 Fig. 10.9 IDP -48V GND DCDP2 -48V 240mm2 PGD2 Red
busbar GND busbar

Note :
There can be maximum of four such cable pairs PPD1 and PGD1 to DCDP1
and PPD2 and PGD2 to DCDP2. The actual number of cables to be used will
depend upon the number of suites installed.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 123


Chapter 10.

10.5.3. Detail of -48V & -48V GND DC Cables from DCDP1 to IOP PDP
CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXLPPM1-000 (Blue)
ACB-MAXLPPC1-000 (Blue)
ACB-MAXLPGM1-000 (Red)

DRAWING NO. : Fig. 10.10

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSCP28-401 (Blue)


MCA-PVCSCP08-401 (Red)

CABLE MARKER NO. : As per Table 10.4

CABLE SPECIFICATION : Power cable, Single core 25mm2

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : As per Table 10.4

CABLE LENGTH : Site dependent

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCT-ERRIN310-401


25mm2 - Ring Terminal Crimp Type

DESTINATION TERMINATION NO. : MCT-ERRIN310-401


25mm2 - Ring Terminal Crimp Type

SOURCE : As per Table 10.4

DESTINATION : As per Table 10.4

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Crimping tool SYB-95


Die to be used JBR-5

Note :
Two such cables will be there - from DCDP1 for keeping redundancy. Refer
Fig. 10.7 (b) for Block Diagram.

124 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 125


Chapter 10.

Table 10.4
SL. C-DOT ASSY NO DRAWING FROM TO SIZE CABLE COLOUR
No. NO. MARKER

1. ACB-MAXLPPM1-000 Fig. 10.10 -48V DCDP1 -48V busbar 25mm2 PPM1 Blue
IOP-PDP MCB IOP-PDP

2. ACB-MAXLPPM1-000 Fig. 10.10 -48V DCDP1 -48V busbar 25mm2 PPM1 -do-
IOP-PDP MCB IOP PDP

3. ACB-MAXLPPC1-000 Fig. 10.10 -48V DCDP1 IOP-PDP 25mm2 PPC1 -do-


MISC MCB (-48V OMC
busbar

4. ACB-MAXLPGM1-000 Fig. 10.10 -48V GND DCDP1 -48V GND bus 25mm2 PGM1 Red
busbar bar IOP PDP

5. ACB-MAXLPGM1-000 Fig. 10.10 -48V GND DCDP1 -48V GND bus 25mm2 PGM1 -do-
busbar bar IOP PDP

126 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

10.5.4. Detail of -48V and -48V GND DC Cables from DCDP to PDP
CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXLPLXX-000
ACB-MAXLPNXX-000

DRAWING NO. : Fig. 10.11

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSCP33-401 (Blue)


MCA-PVCSCP13-401 (Red)

CABLE MARKER NO. : PLXX (Blue)


PNXX (Red)

CABLE SPECIFICATION : Power cable, Single core 120mm2

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : As per Table 10.5

CABLE LENGTH : Site dependent

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCT-ERRIN421-401 150mm2 -


Ring Terminal Crimp Type

DESTINATION TERMINATION NO. : MCT-ERRIN421-401 150mm2 -


Ring Terminal Crimp Type

SOURCE : As per Table 10.5

DESTINATION : As per Table 10.5

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Crimping tool SYD-20


Die to be used JDR-13

Note :
XX takes different values as depicted in Table 10.5.
Refer Fig. 10.7 (b) & (c) for Block Diagrams.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 127


Chapter 10.

128 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

TABLE 10.5
SL. C-DOT ASSY NO DRAWING FROM TO SIZE CABLE COLOUR
No. NO. MARKER

1. ACB-MAXLPL01-000 FIG. 10.11 DCDP1 PDP (copy 0) 120mm2 PL01 Blue


-48V busbar MCB -48V busbar
(Suite 1) Suite 1

2. ACB-MAXLPL02-000 FIG. 10.11 DCDP1 PDP (copy 1) 120mm2 PL02 Blue


-48V busbar MCB -48V busbar
(Suite 1) Suite 1

3. ACB-MAXLPL03-000 FIG. 10.11 DCDP1 PDP (copy 0) 120mm2 PL03 Blue


-48V busbar MCB -48V busbar
(Suite 2) Suite 2

4. ACB-MAXLPL04-000 FIG. 10.11 DCDP1 PDP (copy 1) 120mm2 PL04 Blue


-48V busbar MCB -48V busbar
(Suite 2) Suite 2

5. ACB-MAXLPL05-000 FIG. 10.11 DCDP1 PDP (copy 0) 120mm2 PL05 Blue


-48V MCB -48V busbar
(Suite 3) Suite 3

6. ACB-MAXLPL06-000 FIG. 10.11 DCDP1 PDP (copy 1) 120mm2 PL06 Blue


-48V MCB -48V busbar
(Suite 3) Suite 3

7. ACB-MAXLPL07-000 FIG. 10.11 DCDP2 PDP (copy 0) 120mm2 PL07 Blue


-48V MCB -48V busbar
(Suite 4) Suite 4

8. ACB-MAXLPL08-000 FIG. 10.11 DCDP2 PDP (copy 1) 120mm2 PL08 Blue


-48V MCB -48V busbar
(Suite 4) Suite 4

9. ACB-MAXLPL09-000 FIG. 10.11 DCDP2 PDP (copy 0) 120mm2 PL09 Blue


-48V MCB -48V busbar
(Suite 5) Suite 5

10. ACB-MAXLPL10-000 FIG. 10.11 DCDP2 PDP (copy 1) 120mm2 PL10 Blue
-48V MCB -48V busbar
(Suite 5) Suite 5

11. ACB-MAXLPN01-000 FIG. 10.11 DCDP1 PDP (copy 0) 120mm2 PN01 Red
-48V gnd busbar -48V gnd busbar
Suite 1

12. ACB-MAXLPN02-000 FIG. 10.11 DCDP1 PDP (copy 1) 120mm2 PN02 Red
-48V gnd busbar -48V gnd busbar
Suite 1

13. ACB-MAXLPN03-000 FIG. 10.11 DCDP1 PDP (copy 0) 120mm2 PN03 Red
-48V gnd busbar -48V gnd busbar
Suite 2

14. ACB-MAXLPN04-000 FIG. 10.11 DCDP1 PDP (copy 1) 120mm2 PN04 Red
-48V gnd busbar -48V gnd busbar
Suite 2

15. ACB-MAXLPN05-000 FIG. 10.11 DCDP1 PDP (copy 0) 120mm2 PN05 Red
-48V gnd busbar -48V gnd busbar
Suite 3

16. ACB-MAXLPN06-000 FIG. 10.11 DCDP1 PDP (copy 1) 120mm2 PN06 Red
-48V gnd busbar -48V gnd busbar

INSTALLATION MANUAL 129


Chapter 10.

SL. C-DOT ASSY NO DRAWING FROM TO SIZE CABLE COLOUR


No. NO. MARKER
-48V gnd busbar Suite 3

17. ACB-MAXLPN07-000 FIG. 10.11 DCDP2 PDP (copy 0) 120mm2 PN07 Red
-48V gnd busbar -48V gnd busbar
Suite 4

18 ACB-MAXLPN08-000 FIG. 10.11 DCDP2 PDP (copy 1) 120mm2 PN08 Red


-48V gnd busbar -48V gnd busbar
Suite 4

19. ACB-MAXLPN09-000 FIG. 10.11 DCDP2 PDP (copy 0) 120mm2 PN09 Red
-48V gnd busbar -48V gnd busbar
Suite 5

20. ACB-MAXLPN10-000 FIG. 10.11 DCDP2 PDP (copy 1) 120mm2 PN10 Red
-48V gnd busbar -48V gnd busbar
Suite 5

Note :
-48V GND busbar at DCDPs has provision to terminate cable on both sides,
front as well as back. Copy 0 terminations of PDP are taken from front side
and copy 1 terminations of PDP from back side for each suite.

130 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

10.5.5. Detail of -48V and -48V GND DC Cables from DCDPs to Invertor
CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXLPPIX-000
ACB-MAXLPGIX-000

DRAWING NO. : Fig. 10.12

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSCP28-401 (Blue)


MCA-PVCSCP08-401 (Red)

CABLE MARKER NO. : PPIX (Blue)


PGIX (Red)

CABLE SPECIFICATION : Power cable, Single core 25mm2

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : As per Table 10.6

CABLE LENGTH : Site dependent

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCT-ERRIN310-401 25mm2 -


Ring Terminal Crimp Type

DESTINATION TERMINATION PART : MCT-ERRIN310-401 25mm2 -


NO. Ring Terminal Crimp Type

SOURCE : As per Table 10.6

DESTINATION : As per Table 10.6

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Crimping tool SYB-95


Die to be used JBR-5

Note :
X takes different values as depicted in Table 10.6.
Refer Fig. 10.7 (b) and (c) for inverter connections.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 131


Chapter 10.

132 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

TABLE 10.6
SL. C-DOT ASSY NO DRAWING FROM TO SIZE CABLE COLOUR
No. NO. MARKER

1. ACB-MAXLPPI1-000 FIG. 10.12 DCDP1 Invertor -1 25mm2 PPI1 Blue


-48V INV-1 -48V cable

2. ACB-MAXLPGI1-000 FIG. 10.12 DCDP1 Invertor -1 25mm2 PGI1 Red


-48V gnd -48V gnd cable

3. ACB-MAXLPPI2-000 FIG. 10.12 DCDP1 Invertor -2 25mm2 PPI2 Blue


-48V INV-2 -48V cable

4. ACB-MAXLPGI2-000 FIG. 10.12 DCDP1 Invertor -2 25mm2 PGI2 Red


-48V gnd -48V gnd cable

5. ACB-MAXLPPI3-000 FIG. 10.12 DCDP2* Invertor -3 25mm2 PPI3 Blue


-48V INV-1 -48V cable

6. ACB-MAXLPGI3-000 FIG. 10.12 DCDP2* Invertor -3 25mm2 PGI3 Red


-48V gnd -48V gnd cable

* If DCDP2 is not installed, Inverter 3 is connected to DCDP1.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 133


Chapter 10.

10.5.6. Detail of -48V GND DC Cables from PDP to Cabinets


CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXLPGXX-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.13

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSCP07-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : PGXX

CABLE SPECIFICATION : Power cable, Single core 16mm2

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : Red

CABLE LENGTH : As per Table 10.7

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCT-ERRIN038-401 16mm2 -


Ring Terminal Crimp Type

DESTINATION TERMINATION NO. : MCT-ERRIN038-401 16mm2 -


Ring Terminal Crimp Type

SOURCE : As per Table 10.7

DESTINATION : As per Table 10.7

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Crimping tool SYB-95


Die to be used JBR-2

Note :
1. XX takes different values as depicted in Table 10.7.
2. Refer Fig. 10.7 (d) for Block Diagram.

134 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 135


Chapter 10.

TABLE 10.7
SL. C-DOT ASSY NO DRAWING FROM TO SIZE CABLE LENGTH
No. NO. MARKER mm

1. ACB-MAXLPG01-000 FIG. 10.13 PDP GND Cabinet 1 (copy 16mm2 PG01 985
0) Red busbar

2. ACB-MAXLPG03-000 FIG. 10.13 PDP GND Cabinet 2 (copy 16mm2 PG03 2410
0) Red busbar

3. ACB-MAXLPG05-000 FIG. 10.13 PDP GND Cabinet 3 (copy 16mm2 PG05 3410
0) Red busbar

4. ACB-MAXLPG07-000 FIG. 10.13 PDP GND Cabinet 4 (copy 16mm2 PG07 4415
0) Red busbar

5. ACB-MAXLPG09-000 FIG. 10.13 PDP GND Cabinet 5 (copy 16mm2 PG09 5570
0) Red busbar

6. ACB-MAXLPG11-000 FIG. 10.13 PDP GND Cabinet 6 (copy 16mm2 PG11 6700
0) Red busbar

7. ACB-MAXLPG13-000 FIG. 10.13 PDP GND Cabinet 7 (copy 16mm2 PG13 7710
0) Red busbar

8. ACB-MAXLPG15-000 FIG. 10.13 PDP GND Cabinet 8 (copy 16mm2 PG15 8680
0) Red busbar

9. ACB-MAXLPG02-000 FIG. 10.13 PDP GND Cabinet 1 (copy 16mm2 PG02 2410
1) Red busbar

10. ACB-MAXLPG04-000 FIG. 10.13 PDP GND Cabinet 2 (copy 16mm2 PG04 3470
1 ) Red busbar

11. ACB-MAXLPG06-000 FIG. 10.13 PDP GND Cabinet 3 (copy 16mm2 PG06 4430
1) Red busbar

12. ACB-MAXLPG08-000 FIG. 10.13 PDP GND Cabinet 4 (copy 16mm2 PG08 5400
1 ) Red busbar

13. ACB-MAXLPG10-000 FIG. 10.13 PDP GND Cabinet 5 (copy 16mm2 PG10 6755
1) Red busbar

14. ACB-MAXLPG12-000 FIG. 10.13 PDP GND Cabinet 6 (copy 16mm2 PG12 7710
1) Red busbar

15. ACB-MAXLPG14-000 FIG. 10.13 PDP GND Cabinet 7 (copy 16mm2 PG14 8760
1) Red busbar

16. ACB-MAXLPG16-000 FIG. 10.13 PDP GND Cabinet 8 (copy 16mm2 PG16 9560
1) Red busbar

Note :
1. Similar cables for other suites.

136 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

10.5.7.(a) Detail of -48V DC Cables from PDP to Cabinets and FBI Card
CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXLPPXX-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.14 (a)

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSCP27-401


MCA-PVCSCP21-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : PPXX FPXX

CABLE SPECIFICATION : Power cable, Single core 16mm2


- PPXX
Power cable, Single core 1mm2
- FPXX

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : Blue

CABLE LENGTH : As per Table 10.8 (a) - PPXX


120 cm - FPXX

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : --- 16mm2 - Reducer Terminal

DESTINATION TERMINATION NO. : MCT-ERRIN038-401


16mm2 - Ring Terminal Crimp Type
MCC-FASTP001-401 (FPXX)
Faston Receptacle
MCC-FASTP002-401 (FPXX)
Insulating Boot

SOURCE : As per Table 10.8 (a)

DESTINATION : As per Table 10.8 (a)

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Crimping tool SYB-95


Die to be used JBR-2
Crimping Tool SYT-2 - FPXX

Note :
XX takes different values as depicted in Table 10.8 (a)
Refer Fig. 10.7 (d) for block diagram.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 137


Chapter 10.

138 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

TABLE 10.8 (a)


SL. C-DOT ASSY NO DRAWING FROM TO SIZE CABLE LENGTH
No. NO. MARKER mm

1. ACB-MAXLPP01-000 FIG. 10.14 (a) PDP fuse Cabinet 1 (copy 16mm2 PP01 1130
F1 0) Blue Busbar
FBI Card J1 1mm2 FP01 1200

2. ACB-MAXLPP03-000 FIG. 10.14 (a) PDP fuse Cabinet 2 (copy 16mm2 PP03 2650
F3 0) Blue Busbar
FBI Card J3 1mm2 FP03 1200

3. ACB-MAXLPP05-000 FIG. 10.14 (a) PDP fuse Cabinet 3 (copy 16mm2 PP05 3680
F5 0) Blue Busbar
FBI Card J5 1mm2 FP05 1200

4. ACB-MAXLPP07- 000 FIG. 10.14 (a) PDP fuse Cabinet 4 (copy 16mm2 PP07 4705
F7 0) Blue Busbar
FBI Card J7 1mm2 FP07 1200

5. ACB-MAXLPP09-000 FIG. 10.14 (a) PDP fuse Cabinet 5 (copy 16mm2 PP09 5870
F9 0) Blue Busbar
FBI Card J9 1mm2 FP09 1200

6. ACB-MAXLPP11-000 FIG. 10.14 (a) PDP fuse Cabinet 6 (copy 16mm2 PP11 6990
F11 0) Blue Busbar
FBI Card J11 1mm2 FP11 1200

7. ACB-MAXLPP13-000 FIG. 10.14 (a) PDP fuse Cabinet 7 (copy 16mm2 PP13 8075
F13 0) Blue Busbar
FBI Card J13 1mm2 FP13 1200

8. ACB-MAXLPP15-000 FIG. 10.14 (a) PDP fuse Cabinet 8 (copy 16mm2 PP15 9055
F15 0) Blue Busbar
FBI Card J15 1mm2 FP15 1200

9. ACB-MAXLPP02-000 FIG. 10.14 (a) PDP fuse Cabinet 1 (copy 16mm2 PP02 2830
F2 1) Blue Busbar
FBI Card J2 1mm2 FP02 1200

10. ACB-MAXLPP04-000 FIG. 10.14 (a) PDP fuse Cabinet 2 (copy 16mm2 PP04 3840
F4 1) Blue Busbar
FBI Card J4 1mm2 FP04 1200

11. ACB-MAXLPP06-000 FIG. 10.14 (a) PDP fuse Cabinet 3 (copy 16mm 2 PP06 4815
F6 1) Blue Busbar
FBI Card J6 1mm 2 FP06 1200

12. ACB-MAXLPP08-000 FIG. 10.14 (a) PDP fuse Cabinet 4 (copy 16mm2 PP08 5830
F8 1) Blue Busbar
FBI Card J8 1mm2 FP08 1200

13. ACB-MAXLPP10-000 FIG. 10.14 (a) PDP fuse Cabinet 5 (copy 16mm2 PP10 7190
F10 1) Blue Busbar
FBI Card J10 1mm2 FP10 1200

14. ACB-MAXLPP12-000 FIG. 10.14 (a) PDP fuse Cabinet 6 (copy 16mm2 PP12 8160
F12 1) Blue Busbar
FBI Card J12 1mm2 FP12 1200

15. ACB-MAXLPP14-000 FIG. 10.14 (a) PDP fuse Cabinet 7 (copy 16mm2 PP14 9245
F14 1) Blue Busbar
FBI Card J14 1mm2 FP14 1200

16. ACB-MAXLPP16-000 FIG. 10.14 (a) PDP fuse Cabinet 8 (copy 16mm2 PP16 10068
F16 1) Blue Busbar

INSTALLATION MANUAL 139


Chapter 10.

SL. C-DOT ASSY NO DRAWING FROM TO SIZE CABLE LENGTH


No. NO. MARKER mm

F16 FBI Card J16 1mm2 FP16 1200

17. ACB-MAXXFP17-000 FIG. 10.14 (b) Copy 0 busbar of FBI card J17 2.5mm2 FP17 3700
CM cabinet

18. ACB-MAXXFP19-000 FIG. 10.14 (b) Copy 0 busbar of FBI card J19 2.5mm2 FP19 3700
CM cabinet

19. ACB-MAXXFP18-000 FIG. 10.14 (b) Copy 1 busbar of FBI card J18 2.5mm2 FP18 4700
CM cabinet

20. ACB-MAXXFP20-000 FIG. 10.14 (b) Copy 1 busbar of FBI card J20 2.5mm2 FP20 4700
CM cabinet

140 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

10.5.7 (b) Detail of -48V DC Cables from CM Cabinet to FBI Card


CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXXFPXX-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.14 (b)

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSCP23-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : FPXX

CABLE SPECIFICATION : Power Cable, 2.5mm2

CABLE LENGTH : As per Table 10.8 (a), Sl. No. 17-20.

SOURCE TERMINATION PART : MCT-ERRIN102-401


Ring terminal

DESTINATION TERMINATION NO. : MCC-FASTP001-401


MCC-FASTP002-401

SOURCE PLACEMENT : As per Table 10.8 (a)

DESTINATION PLACEMENT : As per Table 10.8 (a)

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Crimping tool SYT-2.

Note :
XX takes values 17 t0 20 shown in Table 10.8 (a).

INSTALLATION MANUAL 141


Chapter 10.

142 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

10.5.7 (c) Detail of Cables from MCBs of DCDP to FBI Card (for Sensing MCB's
Failure)
CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXLDFXX-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.14 (c)

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSCP21-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : DFXX

CABLE SPECIFICATION : Power Cable single core 1mm2

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : Blue

CABLE LENGTH : As per Table 10.8 (b)

SOURCE TERMINATION PART : MCC-FASTP001-401


Faston Receptacle
MCC-FASTP002-401
Insulating Boot

DESTINATION TERMINATION NO. : MCT-ERRII004-401


Ring terminal 1.5 sg.mn

SOURCE : As per Table 10.8 (b)

DESTINATION : As per Table 10.8 (b)

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Crimping tool : SYA-427

Note :
XX takes different values as depicted in Table 10.8 (b).

INSTALLATION MANUAL 143


Chapter 10.

144 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

10.5.7 (d) Detail of Cable from IOP-VH to FBI Card (IOP-PDP) (for Sensing
IOP-ERROR)
CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXLIERX-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.14 (d)

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSC005-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : IERX

CABLE SPECIFICATION : PVC single core (7/0.2)

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : Black

CABLE LENGTH : 7 Meters

SOURCE TERMINATION PART : MCC-SPFSC702-002


MCC-PIFSC000-001
CONN S/R FEMALE 2 PIN HOUSING

DESTINATION TERMINATION PART : MCC-FASTP001-401


Faston Receptacle
MCC-FASTP002-401
Insulating Boot

SOURCE : IOP ERR POINT IN IOP-VH

DESTINATION : FBI CARD (IOP-PDP ) J21/J22

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Crimping tool : SYA-427

Note :
i) X takes values 0 for IOP-0 1 for IOP-1
ii) In IOP-VH it is to be ensured that the pins C28 and C32 of power
connector are shorted to enable this alarm if already not done.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 145


Chapter 10.

146 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

TABLE 10.8 (b)


SL. C-DOT ASSY NO FROM TO CABLE CABLE
No. MARKER LENGTH

For DCDP1

1. ACB-MAXLDF11-000 Suite 1 copy 0 FBI card J1 DF11 1800mm


MCB

2. ACB-MAXLDF12-000 Suite 2 copy 0 FBI card J3 DF12 1800mm


MCB

3. ACB-MAXLDF13-000 Suite 3 copy 0 FBI card J5 DF13 1800mm


MCB

4. ACB-MAXLDF14-000 Suite 1 copy 1 FBI card J2 DF14 2800mm


MCB

5. ACB-MAXLDF15-000 Suite 2 copy 1 FBI card J4 DF15 2800mm


MCB

6. ACB-MAXLDF16-000 Suite 3 copy 1 FBI card J6 DF16 2800mm


MCB

7. ACB-MAXLDF17-000 Invertor 1 MCB FBI card J7 DF17 1800mm

8. ACB-MAXLDF18-000 Invertor 2 MCB FBI card J8 DF18 1800mm

9. ACB-MAXLDF19-000 IOP PDP copy 0 FBI card J9 DF19 1800mm


MCB

10. ACB-MAXLDF20-000 IOP PDP copy 1 FBI card J10 DF20 2800mm
MCB

11. ACB-MAXLDF21-000 Misc. MCB FBI card J11 DF21 2800mm

For DCDP2

12. ACB-MAXLDF22-000 Suite 4 copy 0 FBI card J1 DF22 1800mm


MCB

13. ACB-MAXLDF23-000 Suite 5 copy 0 FBI card J3 DF23 1800mm


MCB

14. ACB-MAXLDF24-000 Suite 4 copy 1 FBI card J2 DF24 2800mm


MCB

15. ACB-MAXLDF25-000 Suite 5 copy 1 FBI card J4 DF25 2800mm


MCB

*16. ACB-MAXLDF26-000 Invertor 3 MCB FBI card J5 DF26 2800mm

* If DCDP2 is not installed, inverter 3 can be connected from DCDP1.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 147


Chapter 10.

10.5.8. Detail of Cable from PDP (Digital Earth) to Cabinet


CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXLPDXX-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.15

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSCP46-401

CABLE MARKER : PDXX

CABLE SPECIFICATION : Power Cable, Single Core 10mm2

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : Black

CABLE LENGTH : As per Table 10.9

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : 10mm2 Ring Terminal


MCT-ERRIN200-401

DESTINATION TERMINATION NO. : 10mm2 Ring Terminal


MCT-ERRIN200-401

SOURCE : As per Table 10.9

DESTINATION : As per Table 10.9

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Crimping Tool SYB-95


Die to be used JBR-1

Note :
XX takes different values as depicted in Table 10.9.
Refer Fig. 10.1 (b) for block diagram.

148 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 149


Chapter 10.

TABLE 10.9
SL. C-DOT ASSY NO DRAWING FROM TO SIZE CABLE LENGTH
No. NO. MARKER mm

1. ACB-MAXLPD01-00 FIG. 10.15 PDP (Digital Cabinet 1 (copy 10mm2 PD01 2350
earth) 0) Black Busbar

2. ACB-MAXLPD02-00 FIG. 10.15 PDP (Digital Cabinet 2 (copy 10mm2 PD02 3780
earth) 0) Black Busbar

3. ACB-MAXLPD03-00 FIG. 10.15 PDP (Digital Cabinet 3 (copy 10mm2 PD03 4780
earth) 0) Black Busbar

4. ACB-MAXLPD04-00 FIG. 10.15 PDP (Digital Cabinet 4 (copy 10mm2 PD04 5780
earth) 0) Black Busbar

5. ACB-MAXLPD05-00 FIG. 10.15 PDP (Digital Cabinet 5 (copy 10mm2 PD05 6940
earth) 0) Black Busbar

6. ACB-MAXLPD06-00 FIG. 10.15 PDP (Digital Cabinet 6 (copy 10mm2 PD06 8070
earth) 0) Black Busbar

7. ACB-MAXLPD07-00 FIG. 10.15 PDP (Digital Cabinet 7 (copy 10mm2 PD07 9080
earth) 0) Black Busbar

8. ACB-MAXLPD08-00 FIG. 10.15 PDP (Digital Cabinet 8 (copy 10mm2 PD08 10050
earth) 0) Black Busbar

9. ACB-MAXLPD09-00 FIG. 10.15 PDP (Digital Cabinet 3 (copy 10mm2 PD09 5780
earth) 1) Black Busbar

Note :
1. Similar cables for other suites.
2. Item No. 9 is required in case of CM cabinet only.

150 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

10.5.9. Detail of Cable from PDP (Chassis Earth) to Cabinet


CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXLPEXX-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.16

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSCP46-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : PEXX

CABLE SPECIFICATION : Power Cable, Single Core 10mm2

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : Black

CABLE LENGTH : As per Table 10.10

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : 10mm2 Ring Terminal


MCT-ERRIN200-401

DESTINATION TERMINATION NO. : 10mm2 Ring Terminal


MCT-ERRIN200-401

SOURCE : As per Table 10.10

DESTINATION : As per Table 10.10

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Crimping Tool SYB-95


Die to be used JBR-1

Note :
XX takes different values as depicted in Table 10.10.
Refer Fig. 10.1 (b) for block diagram.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 151


Chapter 10.

152 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

TABLE 10.10
SL. C-DOT ASSY NO FROM TO CABLE CABLE
No. MARKER LENGTH

1. ACB-MAXLPE01-000 PDP (Chassis Cabinet 1 2150 PE 01


Earth Busbar) Chassis

2. ACB-MAXLPE02-000 - do - Cabinet 2 3940 PE 02


Chassis

3. ACB-MAXLPE03-000 - do - Cabinet 3 4940 PE 03


Chassis

4. ACB-MAXLPE04-000 - do - Cabinet 4 5940 PE 04


Chassis

5. ACB-MAXLPE05-000 - do - Cabinet 5 7100 PE 05


Chassis

6. ACB-MAXLPE06-000 - do - Cabinet 6 8230 PE 06


Chassis

7. ACB-MAXLPE07-000 - do - Cabinet 7 9240 PE 07


Chassis

8. ACB-MAXLPE08-000 - do - Cabinet 8 10210 PE 08


Chassis

Note :
Similar cables for other suites.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 153


Chapter 10.

10.5.10. Detail of Cables from Cabinet (Filter box) Copy 0 to FBI Card (for
Sensing Filter box Fuses)
CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXLFFXX-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.17

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSCP43-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : FFXX

CABLE SPECIFICATION : PVC insulated 2.5mm2 cable

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : Black

CABLE LENGTH : As per Table 10.11

SOURCE TERMINATION PART : MCC-FASTP001-401


Faston Receptacle
MCC-FASTP002-401
Insulating Boot

DESTINATION TERMINATION NO. : MCC-PPFXCT02-000


Powermate Female Connector

SOURCE : As per Table 10.11

DESTINATION : As per Table 10.11

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Crimping tool AMP Make Type-F


No.90124-2-G 20-14

Note :
XX takes different values as depicted in Table 10.11.

154 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 155


Chapter 10.

TABLE 10.11
SL. C-DOT ASSY NO FROM TO CABLE CABLE
No. MARKER LENGTH

1. ACB-MAXLFF01-000 FBI Card J21 Cabinet - 1 FF01 1350


(Copy 0)

2. ACB-MAXLFF02-000 FBI Card J22 Cabinet - 2 FF02 2780


(Copy 0)

3. ACB-MAXLFF03-000 FBI Card J23 Cabinet - 3 FF03 3780


(ER46 of CM)

4. ACB-MAXLFF04-000 FBI Card J24 Cabinet - 4 FF04 4780


(Copy 0)

5. ACB-MAXLFF05-000 FBI Card J25 Cabinet - 5 FF05 5940


(Copy 0)

6. ACB-MAXLFF06-000 FBI Card J26 Cabinet - 6 FF06 7070


(Copy 0)

7. ACB-MAXLFF07-000 FBI Card J27 Cabinet - 7 FF07 8080


(Copy 0)

8. ACB-MAXLFF08-000 FBI Card J28 Cabinet - 8 FF08 9050


(Copy 0)

9. ACB-MAXLFF09-000 FBI Card J29 CM cabinet FF09 3780


Copy 0 child
card daisy
chained (ER44)

10. ACB-MAXLFF10-000 FBI Card J30 CM cabinet FF10 4780


Copy 1 child
card daisy
chained (ER45)

Note :
1. Similar cables (except FF09, FF10) for other suites.
2. FF09 & FF10 cables will come into picture; if CM cabinet comes to the
suit.
3. In the suite, where CM cabinet is installed, the FF03 cable from FBI
card J23 will be terminated to Fan error signal point as mentioned in
Table 10.41. S.No. 44 to 46 (ER44 to ER46).

156 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

10.5.11. Detail of Cable from Copy0 Filter Box to Copy1 Filter Box for
Interconnecting Both Copies in a Cabinet
CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXLFI01-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.18

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSCP43-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : FI01

CABLE SPECIFICATION : PVC Insulated 2.5mm2 Cable

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : Black

CABLE LENGTH : 1000mm

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCC-PPMXCT02-000


Powermate Male Connector
MCC-MPMSC000-001
Pin for Male Connector

DESTINATION TERMINATION NO. : MCC-PPFXCT02-000


Powermate Female Connector
MCC-MPSSC000-001
Pin for Female Connector

SOURCE : BM/LM Frame 6 Copy 1 Female power mate


connector of Filter-box

DESTINATION : BM/LM Frame 6 Copy 0 Male power mate


connector of Filter-box

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : -

Note :
1. Similar cable is used for all the cabinets in all Suites. 8 Cables are
required for each suite except in CM cabinet.
2. Filter box cabling is done by the manufacturer now a days i.e. wired
cabinets are coming, these cabling are not done on site.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 157


Chapter 10.

158 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

10.5.12. Detail of Cable from Copy-1 -48V GND Busbar to Copy1 Filter Box
(Frame 1)
CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXLFG01-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.19

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSCP03-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : FG01

CABLE SPECIFICATION : PVC Insulated 2.5mm2 Cable

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : Red

CABLE LENGTH : 250mm

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCC-PPMXCT02-000


Power Mate Male Connector
MCC-MPMSC000-001
Pin for Male Connector

DESTINATION TERMINATION NO. : (MCT-ERRIN017-401)


Ring Terminal 2.5mm2

SOURCE : Frame 1 copy 1 Filter-box


Male power connector

DESTINATION : Copy 1 -48V GND - Busbar

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : -

Note :
1. Similar cable is used for all the cabinets in all Suites. 8 such cables are
required per suite except CM cabinet.
2. These cablings are done by the manufacturer i.e. wired cabinets are
received from the manufacturer, nothing is to be done on site.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 159


Chapter 10.

160 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

10.5.13. (a) Details of Cable used for Supplying -48V From Suite PDP to FBI
Card
CDOT ASSY NO. : CB-MAXLPPUX-000

DRAWING NO. : IG. 10.20 (a)

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSCP23-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : PPUX

CABLE SPECIFICATION : PVC insulated 2.5mm2 cable (PPUX)

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : Blue

CABLE LENGTH : 1200mm

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCT-ERREN300-401


10mm2 Reducer Terminal

DESTINATION TERMINATION NO. : MCC-FASTP001-401


Faston Receptacle
MCC-FASTP002-401
Insulating Boot

SOURCE : Refer Table 10.12 (a)

DESTINATION : Refer Table 10.12 (a)

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Crimping tool SYT-2

Note :
X takes different values as depicted in Table 10.12. (a).
Similar cables are used for all the five suites.
TABLE 10.12 (a)
Sl. No. CDOT Assy. No. From To Cable Marker

1. ACB-MAXLPPU1-000 Fuse F19 installed FBI Card J41 PPU1


on -48V COPY0
BUSBAR of PDP

2. ACB-MAXLPPU2-000 Fuse F20 installed FBI Card J43 PPU2


on -48V COPY1
BUSBAR of PDP

Refer Fig. 10.7 (d) for connections.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 161


Chapter 10.

162 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

10.5.13 (b) Detail of -48V GND Cable from Suite PDP to FBI Card (Suite) (Supply
of FBI Card)
CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXLPGUX-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.20 (b)

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSCP03-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : PGUX

CABLE SPECIFICATION : PVC insulated 2.5mm2 cable

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : Red

CABLE LENGTH : 1200mm

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCT-ERRIN102-401


2.5mm2 -Ring Terminal Crimp Type

DESTINATION TERMINATION NO. : MCC-FASTP001-401


MCC-FASTP002-401

SOURCE : Refer Table 10.12 (b)

DESTINATION : Refer Table 10.12 (b)

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Crimping tool SYA 427

TABLE 10.12 (b)


Sl. No. CDOT Assy. No. From To Cable Marker

1. ACB-MAXLPGU1-000 -48V Gnd Busbar J37 PGU1


(COPY0 ) on PDP

2. ACB-MAXLPGU2-000 -48V Gnd Busbar J39 PGU2


(COPY1 ) on PDP

Note :
Similar cables are used in all the five suites.
Refer Fig. 10.7 (d) for connections.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 163


Chapter 10.

164 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

10.5.14. Cable used for Supplying -48V & -48V GND from DCDP to FBI Card
of DCDP
CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXLDPUX-000
ACB-MAXLDGUX-000

DRAWING NO. : Fig. 10.21

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSCP23-401 (Blue)


MCA-PVCSCP03-401 (Red)

CABLE MARKER NO. : DPUX (Blue) DGUX (Red)

CABLE SPECIFICATION : PVC insulated 2.5mm2 cable

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : As per Table 10.13

CABLE LENGTH : As per Table 10.13

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCT-ERRIN102-401


2.5mm2 - Ring Terminal Crimp Type

DESTINATION TERMINATION : MCC-FASTP001-401 (Fasten Receptacle)


MCC-FASTP002-401 (Fasten Boot)

SOURCE : As per Table 10.13

DESTINATION : As per Table 10.13

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Crimping tool (SYA-427)

Note :
X takes different values as depicted in Table 10.13.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 165


Chapter 10.

166 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

TABLE 10.13
SL. No. C-DOT ASSY NO FROM TO CABLE COLOUR CABLE
MARKER LENGTH

1. ACB-MAXLDPU1-000 DCDP1-Blue FBI card J41 DPU1 Blue 1800mm


busbar copy 0

2. ACB-MAXLDPU2-000 DCDP1-Blue FBI card J43 DPU2 Blue 2800mm


busbar copy 1

3. ACB-MAXLDPU3-000 DCDP2-Blue FBI card J41 DPU3 Blue 1800mm


busbar copy 0

4. ACB-MAXLDPU4-000 DCDP2-Blue FBI card J43 DPU4 Blue 2800mm


busbar copy 1

5. ACB-MAXLDGU1-000 DCDP1-Red FBI card J37 DGU1 Red 1800mm


busbar copy 0

6. ACB-MAXLDGU2-000 DCDP1-Red FBI card J39 DGU2 Red 2800mm


busbar copy 1

7. ACB-MAXLDGU3-000 DCDP2-Red FBI card J37 DGU3 Red 1800mm


busbar copy 0

8. ACB-MAXLDGU4-000 DCDP2-Red FBI card J39 DGU4 Red 2800mm


busbar copy 1

INSTALLATION MANUAL 167


Chapter 10.

10.5.15. Details of -48V DC Cables from IOP-PDP to IOP PDP FBI Card
CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXLPPVX-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.22

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSCP23-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : PPV1 (-48V copy 0) PPV2 (-48V copy 1)

CABLE SPECIFICATION : 2.5mm2 PVC insulated Cable

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : Blue

CABLE LENGTH : 75 cm

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCT-ERRIN102-401


Ring Terminal 2.5mm2 Crimp type

DESTINATION TERMINATION NO. : MCC-FASTP001-401


Faston Receptacle
MCC-FASTP002-401
Insulating Boot

SOURCE : -48V Busbar of IOP-PDP

DESTINATION : FBI card J41 (PPV1)


FBI card J43 (PPV2)

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Crimping tool SYT 2

Refer Fig. 10.7 (e) for block diagram.

168 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 169


Chapter 10.

10.5.16. Details of –48V GND Cables from IOP PDP to IOP PDP FBI Card
CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXLPGVX-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.23

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSCP03-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : PGV1 (-48V GND copy 0)


PGV2 (-48V GND copy 1)

CABLE SPECIFICATION : 2.52 PVC insulated Cable

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : Red

CABLE LENGTH : 85 cm

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCC-ERRIN102-401


(Ring terminal 2.5 mm2 crimp type)

DESTINATION TERMINATION NO. : MCC-FASTP001-401


Faston Receptacle
MCC-FASTP002-401
Insulating Boot

SOURCE : -48V Gnd busbar of IOP-PDP

DESTINATION : FBI Card J37 (PGV1)


FBI Card J39 (PGV2)

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Crimping tool SYT-2

Refer Fig. 10.7 (e) for block diagram.

170 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 171


Chapter 10.

10.5.17. Detail of Cables for Daisy Chaining of FBI Cards


CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXLPGFX-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.24

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSCP03-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : As per Table 10.14

CABLE SPECIFICATION : PVC insulated 2.5mm2 cable

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : Red

CABLE LENGTH : Site dependent

SOURCE TERMINATION PART : MCC-FASTP001-401


Faston Receptacle
MCC-FASTP002-401
Insulating Boot

DESTINATION TERMINATION NO. : MCC-FASTP001-401


Faston Receptacle
MCC-FASTP002-401
Insulating Boot

SOURCE : As per Table 10.14

DESTINATION : As per Table 10.14

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Crimping Tool SYT-2

Note :
X takes values as per table 10.14.
Refer Fig. 9.4 for connections.

172 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 173


Chapter 10.

TABLE 10.14
Sl. No. CDOT Assy. No. From To Cable Marker

1. ACB-MAXLPGF1-000 DCDP1 FBI Card IOP-PDP FBI card PGF1


J32 J42

2. ACB-MAXLPGF2-000 DCDP2 FBI card DCDP2 FBI card PGF2


J32 J42

3. ACB-MAXLPGF3-000 Suite 1 PDP FBI DCDP2 FBI card PGF3


card J32 J42

4. ACB-MAXLPGF4-000 Suite 2 PDP FBI Suite 1 PDP FBI PGF4


card J32 card J42

5. ACB-MAXLPGF5-000 Suite 3 PDP FBI Suite 2 PDP FBI PGF5


card J32 card J42

6. ACB-MAXLPGF6-000 Suite 4 PDP FBI Suite 3 PDP FBI PGF6


card J32 card J42

7. ACB-MAXLPGF7-000 Suite 5 PDP FBI Suite 4 PDP FBI PGF7


card J32 card J42

Note :
Cable corresponding to DCDP2 is not required if DCDP2 is not used.

174 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

10.5.18. (a ) Detail of Cable from FBI Card (Suite PDP) to Suite Alarm
CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXLPXXX-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.25

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSCP23-401 (Blue)


MCA-PVCSCP03-401 (Red)

CABLE MARKER NO. : As per Table 10.15 (a)

CABLE SPECIFICATION : PVC insulated 2.5mm2 cable

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : As per Table 10.15 (a)

CABLE LENGTH : 3 meter

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCC-FASTP001-401


Faston Receptacle
MCC-FASTP002-401
Insulating Boot

DESTINATION TERMINATION NO. : Stripped wire

SOURCE : As per Table 10.15 (a)

DESTINATION : As per Table 10.15 (a)

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Crimping Tool SYT-2

Note
1. The cables are on per suite basis.
2. XXX takes values as per Table 10.15 (a).
TABLE 10.15 (a)
SL. C-DOT ASSY NO FROM TO CABLE UNIT CABLE
No. COLOUR MARKER

1. ACB-MAXLPGL1-000 Suite PDP FBI Suite Alarm Red PGL1


Card J31 Gnd

2. ACB-MAXLPPL1-000 Suite PDP FBI Suite Alarm Blue PPL1


Card J33 Red lamp

3. ACB-MAXLPPL2-000 Suite PDP FBI Suite Alarm Blue PPL2


Card J35 White lamp

INSTALLATION MANUAL 175


Chapter 10.

176 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

10.5.18 (b) Detail of Cable from FBI Card (DCDP) to Suite Alarm
CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXLDXXX-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.25

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSCP23-401 (Blue)


MCA-PVCSCP03-401 (Red)

CABLE MARKER NO. : As per Table 10.15 (b)

CABLE SPECIFICATION : PVC insulated 2.5mm2 cable

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : As per Table 10.15 (b)

CABLE LENGTH : Site dependent

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCC-FASTP001-401


Faston Receptacle
MCC-FASTP002-401
Insulating Boot

DESTINATION TERMINATION NO. : Stripped wire

SOURCE : As per Table 10.15 (b)

DESTINATION : As per Table 10.15 (b)

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Crimping Tool SYT-2

Note
1. XXX takes values as per Table 10.15 (b).
TABLE 10.15 (b)
SL. C-DOT ASSY NO FROM TO CABLE UNIT CABLE
No. COLOUR MARKER

1. ACB-MAXLPGL1-000 DCDP1 FBI Suite Alarm Red PGL1


Card J31 Gnd

2. ACB-MAXLPPL1-000 DCDP1 FBI Suite Alarm Blue PPL1


Card J33 Red lamp

3. ACB-MAXLPPL2-000 DCDP1 FBI Suite Alarm Blue PPL2


Card J35 White lamp

4. ACB-MAXLPGL2-000 DCDP2 FBI Suite Alarm Red PGL2


Card J31 Gnd

5. ACB-MAXLPPL3-000 DCDP2 FBI Suite Alarm Blue PPL3


Card J33 Red lamp

6. ACB-MAXLPPL4-000 DCDP2 FBI Suite Alarm Blue PPL4


Card J35 White lamp

INSTALLATION MANUAL 177


Chapter 10.

10.5.19. Detail of -48V & -48V GND Cable from IOP-PDP to OMA Panel
CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXLPMP1-000 (Blue)
ACB-MAXLPMG1-000 (Red)

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.26

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSCP23-401 (Blue)


MCA-PVCSCP03-401 (Red)

CABLE MARKER NO. : PMP1 (Blue)


PMG1 (Red)

CABLE SPECIFICATION : PVC insulated 2.5mm2

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : Blue & Red

CABLE LENGTH : Site dependent

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : 2.5mm2 Ring Terminal


MCT-ERRIN018-401

DESTINATION TERMINATION NO. : 2.5mm2 Ring Terminal

SOURCE : OMA 1 point of TB in IOP-PDP (-48V) (PMP1)


OMA 2 point of TB in IOP-PDP (-48V gnd)
(PMG1)

DESTINATION : OMA Panel -48V pin (5) of TB1 (PMP1)


OMA Panel -48V GND pin (6) of TB1 (PMG1)

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : -

Refer Fig. 10.1 (c) and 10.7 (e) for block diagram.

178 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 179


Chapter 10.

10.5.20. Detail of Cable from FBI Card (IOP PDP) to OMA


CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXLPGR1-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.27

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSCP03-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : PGR1

CABLE SPECIFICATION : PVC insulated 2.5mm2 cable

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : Red

CABLE LENGTH : Site dependent

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : Stripped wire

DESTINATION TERMINATION PART : Stripped wire


NO.

SOURCE : IOP PDP TAG BLOCK FBI point

DESTINATION : OMA SWR point (pin1 of TB1)

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : --

Refer Fig. 9.4 for this cable connection.

180 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 181


Chapter 10.

10.5.21. Details of Cable from Invertor to OMA


CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXLGIXX-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.28

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSCP03-401

CABLE SPECIFICATION : PVC Insulated 2.5 mm2 Cable

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : Red

CABLE LENGTH : Site dependent

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : 2.5mm2 Ring Terminal


(MCT-ERRIN018-401)

DESTINATION TERMINATION NO. : Stripped wire

SOURCE : As per Table 10.16

DESTINATION : OMA Panel PT 1 (INV) (TB-1) (Table 10.16)

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : -

Note :
XX can vary from 01 to 03.
TABLE 10.16
S.NO. CDOT ASSY NO. FROM TO CABLE
MARKER

1. ACB-MAXLGI01-000 Invertor 1 OMA Panel (Point 3 of TB1 ) GI01

2. ACB-MAXLGI02-000 Invertor 2 OMA Panel (Point 4 of TB1) GI02

3. ACB-MAXLGI03-000 Invertor 1 Invertor 3 GI03

182 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 183


Chapter 10.

10.5.22. Detail of Cable from Power Plant to OMA


CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXLGP01-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.29

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCSCP03-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : GP01

CABLE SPECIFICATION : PVC Insulated 2.5mm2

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : Red

CABLE LENGTH : Site dependent

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : 2.5 mm2 Ring Terminal


(MCT-ERRIN018-401)

DESTINATION TERMINATION NO. : Stripped wire

SOURCE : Power Plant Failure Output

DESTINATION : OMA Panel Power Plant (TB-1) Point 2

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : -

184 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 185


Chapter 10.

10.5.23. Detail of IOP Power (-48V) Cable


CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXLPPQX-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.30

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCMC045-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : PPQX

CABLE SPECIFICATION : 4 core multistrand (80/0.2mm) cable

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : Black - 4 core multistrand (80/0.2mm) cable

CABLE LENGTH : 6 mtrs

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCC-PSICZ000-301


4 Pin Power Plug female

DESTINATION TERMINATION NO. : MCC-PSICZ000-301


4 Pin Power Plug Female

SOURCE : Refer Table 10.17

DESTINATION : Refer Table 10.17

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : -

TABLE 10.17
Sl. No. CDOT Assy. No. From To Cable Marker

1. ACB-MAXLPPQ1-000 IOP0 IOP PDP shell connector PPQ1


marked for IOP-0

2. ACB-MAXLPPQ2-000 IOP1 IOP PDP shell connector PPQ2


marked for IOP-1

Refer Fig. 10.7 (e) for connections.

186 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 187


Chapter 10.

10.5.24. Detail of ADP Power (-48V) Cable


CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXLPPA3-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.31

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCMC043-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : PPA3

CABLE DESCRIPTION : 4 core multistrand


32/0.2 mm PVC wire

CABLE LENGTH : 35 mtrs (max.)

SOURCE TERMINATION : Power supply shell connector


MCC-PDFXST02-000

DESTINATION TERMINATION NO. : Power Supply Shell Connector


MCC-PDFXST02-000

SOURCE PLACEMENT : IOP PDP shell connector marked for ADP

TAB NO. RETAINED

DESTINATION PLACEMENT : ADP (Back Cover) 25 pin D-type connector.

TAB NO. RETAINED

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : -

Refer Fig. 10.7 (e) for connections.

188 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 189


Chapter 10.

10.6. SIGNAL CABLES


In this section signal cables of following type will be covered.
1. Central Module to IOP
2. IOP0 to IOP1
3. Central Module to ADP
4. BP Terminal Cables (AM/CM/BM and SUM)
5. IOP to VDU terminals
6. IOP to printers
7. Test access cables
8. Concentration cables
9. BM-CM Data cable
10. BM-CM Clock cable
11. Digital Cable for RSU
12. Reference Clock Cable (RCLK) for CM-XL
13. CM Intra Rack Cables
Fig. 10.32 shows BLOCK DIAGRAM of Signal cables.

190 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 191


Chapter 10.

10.6.1. Detail of Cables from Central Module to IOP


CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-IOPHHDXX-000

DRAWING NO. : Fig. 10.33

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PHDTP011-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : HDXX

CABLE DESCRIPTION : 11 pair polyethylene high density isolated


twisted pair cable, 26 AWG

CABLE LENGTH : Site Dependent. MAX-35 meters

CABLE UNIT DESCRIPTION : 11 pair, polyethylene high density cable

WIRE SPECIFICATIONS : 0.4 mm conductor wire dia including insulation


<1 mm

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCC-BPCSZ011-401,


MCC-BPCSZ012-401 and
MCC-BPCSZ022-401

SOURCE PLACEMENT : As per table 10.18

TAB NO. RETAINED : As per table 10.18

DESTINATION TERMINATION PART : MCC-DCMMZ002-301 MCC-DHXXXT25-100


NO.

DESTINATION PLACEMENT : As per table 10.18

TAB NO. RETAINED : As per table 10.18

CONNECTIVITY CONDUCTOR :
ALIGNMENT

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Refer Fig. 10.33, 10.36, 10.37

Note :
XX takes values as per table 10.18
Refer Fig. 10.32 for block diagram.

192 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 193


Chapter 10.

TABLE 10.18
Sl. No. CDOT Assy. No. From To Cable
Marker

1. ACB-IOPHHDX0-000 IOP-0 VHI HDLC2 CM (HPU) frame 6 copy 0, HDX0


J20, position 3

2. ACB-IOPHHDX1-000 IOP-0 VHI HDLC0 CM (HPU) frame 6 copy 1, HDX1


J36, position 3

3. ACB-IOPHHDY0-000 IOP-1 VHI HDLC2 CM (HPU) frame 6 copy 0, HDY0


J20, position 4

4. ACB-IOPHHDY1-000 IOP-1 VHI HDLC0 CM (HPU) frame 6 copy 1, HDY1


J36, position 4

194 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

10.6.2. Details of Cable from IOP0 to IOP1


CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-IOPHHDZ1-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.34

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PHDTP011-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : HDZ1

CABLE SPECIFICATION : 11 Pair polyethylene high density insulated


twisted pair cable, 26 AWG

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : Grey

CABLE LENGTH : 5.5 mtrs. (max.)

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : 1. 25 pin D type wire wrap (male)


MCC-DCMMZ002-301
2. Hood with screw lock
MCC-DHXXXT25-100

DESTINATION TERMINATION PART : 1. 25 pin D-type wire wrap (male)


NO. MCC-DCMMZ002-301
2. Hood with screw lock
MCC-DHXXXT25-100

SOURCE : IOP0 VHI panel HDLC1

DESTINATION : IOP1 VHI panel HDLC1

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Wire wrapping


Tool - 0.5mm
(MCC-MDFPZ025-301)
Ref. Fig. 10.34, 10.36, 10.37.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 195


Chapter 10.

196 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

10.6.3. Detail of Cable from Central Module to ADP


CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXXHA04-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.35

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-ICSBZ008-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : HA04

CABLE DESCRIPTION : Switch board cable 11 pair (0.4mm cond. dia)

CABLE LENGTH : Site Dependent. Max. 35 meters.

CABLE UNIT DESCRIPTION : 11 pair, single strand round cable unit

WIRE SPECIFICATIONS : 0.4 mm conductor wire dia including insulation


< 1 mm

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCC-BPCSZ011-401,


MCC-BPCSZ012-401
MCC-BPCSZ022-401

SOURCE PLACEMENT : 6/C0/J20/2 & 6/C1/J36/2

TAB NO. RETAINED : 2

DESTINATION TERMINATION PART : MCC-DCFMZ002-301 MCC-DHOLD002-301


NO. and MCC-DSLFZ001-401

DESTINATION PLACEMENT : ADP Link

TAB NO. RETAINED : NA

CONNECTIVITY CONDUCTOR :
ALIGNMENT

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Refer Fig. 10.35, 10.36, 10.37, 10.38

Note : P/Q/R/S : Card frame no./Copy ID/Connector No./Position on


connector.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 197


Chapter 10.

198 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 199


Chapter 10.

200 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 201


Chapter 10.

10.6.4. Details of BP Terminal Cable for AM/CM/BM


C-DOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXXBPTX-000

DRAWING NO. : Fig. 10.39

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-ICSBZ007-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : BPT X *

CABLE DESCRIPTION : 8 pair telephone cable.


(only 4 pairs are used).

CABLE LENGTH : 25m. (max.) excluding unsheathed section.

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : 7X2 IDC Crimp connector


MCC-BPCSZ012-401
MCC-BPCSZ011-401
MCC-BPCSZ022-401

DESTINATION TERMINATION PART : 25 pin D-type wire wrap


NO. (Female)
MCC-DCFMZ002-301
MCC-DHXXXT25-100

SOURCE PLACEMENT :

BM (BP) CM (SSC) CM (AP) CM (AP)

COPY0 COPY1 COPY0 COPY1 COPY0 COPY1

5/J7/4 5/J24/4 5/J25/1 5/J52/1 6/J20/1 6/J36/1

DESTINATION PLACEMENT : VDUs

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Crimping Tool and Wire wrapping tool.


Fig. 10.39

*X = 1 for BP-0 and 2 for BP-1

202 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 203


Chapter 10.

10.6.4 (a) Details of BP Terminal Cable for SUM


C-DOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXXSUTX-000

DRAWING NO. : Fig. 10.39 (a)

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-ICSBZ007-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : SUTX

CABLE DESCRIPTION : 8 pair telephone cable.


(only 4 pairs are used).

CABLE LENGTH : 25m. (max.) excluding unsheathed section.

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : 7X2 IDC Crimp connector


MCC-BPCSZ012-401
MCC-BPCSZ011-401 source
MCC-BPCSZ022-401

DESTINATION TERMINATION PART : 25 pin D-type wire wrap (Female)


NO. MCC-DCFMZ002-301
MCC-DHXXXT25-100

SOURCE PLACEMENT : Slot 5/Connector A/Tab 2

DESTINATION PLACEMENT : VDUs

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Crimping Tool and Wire wrapping tool.

204 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 205


Chapter 10.

10.6.5. Detail of Cable from IOP to VDU Terminals


CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-IOPHTEZZ-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.40

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-ICSBZ007-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : TE`ZZ’

CABLE SPECIFICATION : 8 Pair Telephone cable

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : Grey

CABLE LENGTH : 25 meter (max.)

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : 9 Pin D-type wire wrap


MCC-DCFMZ009-301
MCC-DHXXXT09-100

DESTINATION TERMINATION PART : 25 Pin D-type wire wrap


NO. MCC-DCFMZ002-301
MCC-DHXXXT25-100

SOURCE : As per Table 10.19

DESTINATION : As per Table 10.19

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Wire wrapping tool 0.5 mm


MCC-MDFPZ025-30

Note :
1. ZZ takes different values as listed in Table 10.19.
2. If cable length of terminal is exceeding 25 meters then terminal access
will be through ACIA driver/receiver. The part code of ACIA
driver/receiver is ACP-LD08001D-000.

206 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

\DESIGN\DSSMAX\MAX-XL\MAX-XLIM\MXI-IPTC

INSTALLATION MANUAL 207


Chapter 10.

TABLE 10.19
SL. NO. C-DOT ASSY NO FROM TO CABLE
MARKER NO

1. ACB-IOPHTEX1-000 IOP0 VHI (console) Console Terminal TEX1

2. ACB-IOPHTEX2-000 IOP0 VHI ASIO-2 CRP Terminal TEX2

3. ACB-IOPHTEX3-000 IOP0 VHI ASIO-3 OOD Terminal TEX3

4. ACB-IOPHTEX4-000 IOP0 VHI ASIO-4 CRP Terminal TEX4

5. ACB-IOPHTEX5-000 IOP0 VHI ASIO-5 CRP Terminal TEX5

6. ACB-IOPHTEX6-000 IOP0 VHI ASIO-6 Operator Terminal TEX6

7. ACB-IOPHTEX7-000 IOP0 VHI ASIO-7 Operator Terminal TEX7

8. ACB-IOPHTEY1-000 IOP1 VHI (console) Console Terminal TEY1

9. ACB-IOPHTEY2-000 IOP1 VHI ASIO-2 CRP Terminal TEY2

10. ACB-IOPHTEY3-000 IOP1 VHI ASIO-3 OOD Terminal TEY3

11. ACB-IOPHTEY4-000 IOP1 VHI ASIO-4 CRP Terminal TEY4

12. ACB-IOPHTEY5-000 IOP1 VHI ASIO-5 CRP Terminal TEY5

13. ACB-IOPHTEY6-000 IOP1 VHI ASIO-6 Operator Terminal TEY6

14. ACB-IOPHTEY7-000 IOP1 VHI ASIO-7 Operator Terminal TEY7

208 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

10.6.6. Detail of Cables from IOP to Printer

CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-IOPHPRIX-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.41

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-ICSBZ007-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : PRIX

CABLE SPECIFICATION : 8 Pair Telephone Cable (0.4mm)

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : Grey

CABLE LENGTH : 25 mtr. (max.) Site dependent

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : 9 pin D-type wire wrap (female)


MCC-DCFMZ009-301
MCC-DHXXXT09-100

DESTINATION TERMINATION PART : 25 pin D-type wire wrap (female)


NO. MCC-DCFMZ002-301
MCC-DHXXXT25-100

SOURCE : As per Table 10.20

DESTINATION : As per Table 10.20

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Wire wrapping tool 0.5mm


MCC-MDFPZ025-301

Note :
X takes different values as depicted in Table 10.20.
TABLE 10.20
SL. NO. C-DOT ASSY NO FROM TO CABLE
MARKER NO.

1. ACB-IOPHPRI0-000 IOP0 VHI ASIO-1 Printer1 PRI0

2. ACB-IOPHPRI1-000 IOP1 VHI ASIO-1 Printer2 PRI1

INSTALLATION MANUAL 209


210
Chapter 10.

\DESIGN\DSSMAX\MAX-XL\MAX-XLIM\MXI-IPPC

C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

10.6.7. Detail of Test Access Cables


CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXXTAYY-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.42

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-FCICZ014-301

CABLE MARKER NO. : TAYY

CABLE SPECIFICATION : 7/36, 28 AWG Grey colour with Red beading

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : Grey colour with Red beading

CABLE LENGTH : As per table 10.21.

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCC-BPCSZ009-401 and


2X7 contact block (flat cable)
MCC-BPCSZ010-401
2X7 piercing block with cover

DESTINATION TERMINATION PART : MCC-BPCSZ009-401 and


NO. MCC-BPCSZ010-401

SOURCE : As per Table 10.21

DESTINATION : As per Table 10.21

CONNECTIVITY/CONDUCTOR : One to one: Red coloured conductor on top


ALIGNMENT (pin 1)

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Tool type - HT227 Berg Electronics

Note :
YY takes different values as depicted in Table 10.21.
This cable is only for Analog BMs.
Refer Fig. 10.43 for cable routing.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 211


Chapter 10.

212 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 213


Chapter 10.

TABLE 10.21
SL. No. C-DOT ASSY NO CABLE FROM TO REMARKS CABLE
MARKER NO. X/P/Q/R/S/T X/P/Q/R/S/T LENGHT

1. ACB-MAXXTA01-000 TA01 X/1/1/2/A/4 X/1/2/2/A/4 Daisy chained 195 cm


X/1/2/2/A/4 X/1/3/2/A/4 Cable for test
X/1/3/2/A/4 X/1/4/2/A/4 access

2. ACB-MAXXTA02-000 TA02 X/1/1/2/A/3 X/2/1/2/A/4 Daisy chained 280 cm


X/2/1/2/A/4 X/2/2/2/A/4 Cable for test
X/2/2/2/A/4 X/2/3/2/A/4 access

3. ACB-MAXXTA03-000 TA03 X/1/2/2/A/3 X/3/1/2/A/4 Daisy chained 280 cm


X/3/1/2/A/4 X/3/2/2/A/4 Cable for test
X/3/2/2/A/4 X/3/3/2/A/4 access

4. ACB-MAXXTA04-000 TA04 X/1/3/2/A/3 X/2/4/2/A/4 Daisy chained 280 cm


X/2/4/2/A/4 X/2/5/2/A/4 Cable for test
X/2/5/2/A/4 X/2/6/2/A/4 access

5. ACB-MAXXTA05-000 TA05 X/1/4/2/A/3 X/3/4/2/A/4 Daisy chained 280 cm


X/3/4/2/A/4 X/3/5/2/A/4 Cable for test
X/3/5/2/A/4 X/3/6/2/A/4 access

Note :
Connector insertion position indicated as X/P/Q/R/S/T
X = BM number
P = Rack number (1-3)
Q = Frame/Card cage no. (1-6)
R = Slot no. (1-26)
S = Connector row number (A, B)
T = Position on connector (1-4) (Also indicates polarisation tab to be
retained on the connector)
Note : X can take values 1 to 32.
Modification in Test Access Cable routing and placement in case of
Digital Trunk Terminal Unit (DTU/ISTU/CCS7 UNIT) :
a) If principal TU is DTU/CSU then concerned TA cable is not at all
required as there would not be any analog trunks in this ITU.
Also note that test access cable does not get inserted on the 2nd slot of
the motherboard at all if the terminal unit happens to be a Digital
Trunk Unit (DTU/CCS7 UNIT).
b) If principal TU is ISTU, then concerned TA cable has to be put in the
position J1/4 connector.

214 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

10.6.8. Detail of Concentration Cables


CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXXTLYY-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.44 (a)

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-CCICF007-301

CABLE MARKER NO. : TLYY

CABLE SPECIFICATION : 28 AWG, 7/36 Colour coded,


7 Pair twisted flat cable

CABLE LENGTH : 1524 mm max.

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCC-BPCSZ009-401 and


MCC-BPCSZ010-401

DESTINATION TERMINATION PART : MCC-BPCSZ009-401 and


NO. MCC-BPCSZ010-401

SOURCE : As per Table 10.22

DESTINATION : As per Table 10.22

CONNECTIVITY/CONDUCTOR : One to one; Brown pair at Pin 1


ALIGNMENT

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Tool type - Berg HT227

Note :
1. YY takes different values as depicted in Table 10.22.
2. For each Base Module and its corresponding Line Module, a set of 48
concentration cables TL01 to TL48 will be required.
3. Concentration is not provided in Trunk Base Modules.
Refer Fig. 10.44 (b) for cable routing.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 215


Chapter 10.

216 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 217


Chapter 10.

TABLE 10.22
SL. No. C-DOT ASSY NO CABLE FROM TO REMARKS
MARKER NO. X/P/Q/R/S/T X/P/Q/R/S/T

1. ACB-MAXXTL01-000 TL01 X/1/1/13/A/3 X/2/1/13/A/1 Terminal Unit

2. ACB-MAXXTL02-000 TL02 X/1/1/14/A/3 X/2/1/14/A/1 TU11-TU12

3. ACB-MAXXTL03-000 TL03 X/1/1/13/A/4 X/2/1/13/A/2

4. ACB-MAXXTL04-000 TL04 X/1/1/14/A/4 X/2/1/14/A/2

5. ACB-MAXXTL05-000 TL05 X/2/1/13/A/3 X/2/2/13/A/1 Terminal Unit

6. ACB-MAXXTL06-000 TL06 X/2/1/14/A/3 X/2/2/14/A/1 TU12-TU13

7. ACB-MAXXTL07-000 TL07 X/2/1/13/A/4 X/2/2/13/A/2

8. ACB-MAXXTL08-000 TL08 X/2/1/14/A/4 X/2/2/14/A/2

9. ACB-MAXXTL09-000 TL09 X/2/2/13/A/3 X/2/3/13/A/1 Terminal Unit

10. ACB-MAXXTL10-000 TL10 X/2/2/14/A/3 X/2/3/14/A/1 TU13-TU14

11. ACB-MAXXTL11-000 TL11 X/2/2/13/A/4 X/2/3/13/A/2

12. ACB-MAXXTL12-000 TL12 X/2/2/14/A/4 X/2/3/14/A/2

13. ACB-MAXXTL13-000 TL13 X/1/2/13/A/3 X/3/1/13/A/1 Terminal Unit

14. ACB-MAXXTL14-000 TL14 X/1/2/14/A/3 X/3/1/14/A/1 TU21-TU22

15. ACB-MAXXTL15-000 TL15 X/1/2/13/A/4 X/3/1/13/A/2

16. ACB-MAXXTL16-000 TL16 X/1/2/14/A/4 X/3/1/14/A/2

17. ACB-MAXXTL17-000 TL17 X/3/1/13/A/3 X/3/2/13/A/1 Terminal Unit

18. ACB-MAXXTL18-000 TL18 X/3/1/14/A/3 X/3/2/14/A/1 TU22-TU23

19. ACB-MAXXTL19-000 TL19 X/3/1/13/A/4 X/3/2/13/A/2

20. ACB-MAXXTL20-000 TL20 X/3/1/14/A/4 X/3/2/14/A/2

21. ACB-MAXXTL21-000 TL21 X/3/2/13/A/3 X/3/3/13/A/1 Terminal Unit

22. ACB-MAXXTL22-000 TL22 X/3/2/14/A/3 X/3/3/14/A/1 TU23-TU24

23. ACB-MAXXTL23-000 TL23 X/3/2/13/A/4 X/3/3/13/A/2

24. ACB-MAXXTL24-000 TL24 X/3/2/14/A/4 X/3/3/14/A/2

25. ACB-MAXXTL25-000 TL25 X/1/3/13/A/3 X/2/4/13/A/1 Terminal Unit

26. ACB-MAXXTL26-000 TL26 X/1/3/14/A/3 X/2/4/14/A/1 TU31-TU32

27. ACB-MAXXTL27-000 TL27 X/1/3/13/A/4 X/2/4/13/A/2

28. ACB-MAXXTL28-000 TL28 X/1/3/14/A/4 X/2/4/14/A/2

29. ACB-MAXXTL29-000 TL29 X/2/4/13/A/3 X/2/5/13/A/1 Terminal Unit

30. ACB-MAXXTL30-000 TL30 X/2/4/14/A/3 X/2/5/14/A/1 TU32-TU33

31. ACB-MAXXTL31-000 TL31 X/2/4/13/A/4 X/2/5/13/A/2

218 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

SL. No. C-DOT ASSY NO CABLE FROM TO REMARKS


MARKER NO. X/P/Q/R/S/T X/P/Q/R/S/T

32. ACB-MAXXTL32-000 TL32 X/2/4/14/A/4 X/2/5/14/A/2

33. ACB-MAXXTL33-000 TL33 X/2/5/13/A/3 X/2/6/13/A/1 Terminal Unit

34. ACB-MAXXTL34-000 TL34 X/2/5/14/A/3 X/2/6/14/A/1 TU33-TU34

35. ACB-MAXXTL35-000 TL35 X/2/5/13/A/4 X/2/6/13/A/2

36. ACB-MAXXTL36-000 TL36 X/2/5/14/A/4 X/2/6/14/A/2

37. ACB-MAXXTL37-000 TL37 X/1/4/13/A/3 X/3/4/13/A/1 Terminal Unit

38. ACB-MAXXTL38-000 TL38 X/1/4/14/A/3 X/3/4/14/A/1 TU41-TU42

39. ACB-MAXXTL39-000 TL39 X/1/4/13/A/4 X/3/4/13/A/2

40. ACB-MAXXTL40-000 TL40 X/1/4/14/A/4 X/3/4/14/A/2

41. ACB-MAXXTL41-000 TL41 X/3/4/13/A/3 X/3/5/13/A/1 Terminal Unit

42. ACB-MAXXTL42-000 TL42 X/3/4/14/A/3 X/3/5/14/A/1 TU42-TU43

43. ACB-MAXXTL43-000 TL43 X/3/4/13/A/4 X/3/5/13/A/2

44. ACB-MAXXTL44-000 TL44 X/3/4/14/A/4 X/3/5/14/A/2

45. ACB-MAXXTL45-000 TL45 X/3/5/13/A/3 X/3/6/13/A/1 Terminal Unit

46. ACB-MAXXTL46-000 TL46 X/3/5/14/A/3 X/3/6/14/A/1 TU43-TU44

47. ACB-MAXXTL47-000 TL47 X/3/5/13/A/4 X/3/6/13/A/2

48. ACB-MAXXTL48-000 TL48 X/3/5/14/A/4 X/3/6/14/A/2

Note :
Connector insertion position indicated as X/P/Q/R/S/T
X = BM number
P = Rack number (1-3)
Q = Frame/Card cage no. (1-6)
R = Slot no. (1-26)
S = Connector row number (A,B)
T = Position on connector (1-4) (Also indicates polarisation tab to be
retained on the connector)
Note :
X takes values from 1 to 32.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 219


Chapter 10.

10.6.9. Detail of BM-CM Data Cable


CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXXBDXX-000

DRAWING NO. : 10.45 (a), 10.45 (b)

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PHDTP011-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : BDXX*

CABLE SPECIFICATION : 11X2 unshielded type, AWG 26 Tinned Cu Solid


cdr. .126 sq mm PEHD insulated twisted into
pair.

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : -

CABLE LENGTH : 2 x 20 meter

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCC BPCCB307-302


MCC-BPWPB307-302
MCC-BPCSZ013-401

DESTINATION TERMINATION PART : Same as source Termination Part No.


NO.

SOURCE : As per Table 10.23

DESTINATION : As per Table 10.23

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Tool Type - DUPONT RC-216

* XX varies from 01 to 64 and BM varies from 1 to 32 (for each BM there


are two cables for Bus0 and Bus1).

220 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 221


Chapter 10.

222 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

TABLE 10.23
BUS0 (BTU0)
Sl. No. Cable No. (BDXX) Source (CM Side) Destination (BM Side)
Frame No. : 1 Frame No. : 6

Slot/Connector Tab to be retained Slot/Connector/ : 13/A


Tab to be retained : 2 &3:

BM No.

1. BD01 5/A/3 & 4 1

2. BD03 5/B/1 & 2 2

3. BD05 6/A/3 & 4 3


4. BD07 6/B/1 & 2 4

5. BD09 7/A/3 & 4 5

6. BD11 7/B/1 & 2 6


7. BD13 8/A/3 & 4 7

8. BD15 8/B/1 & 2 8


9. BD17 9/A/3 & 4 9
10. BD19 9/B/1 & 2 10

11. BD21 10/A/3 & 4 11

12. BD23 10/B/1 & 2 12


13. BD25 11/A/3 & 4 13

14. BD27 11/B/1 & 2 14

15. BD29 12/A/3 & 4 15


16. BD31 12/B/1 & 2 16

17. BD33 15/A/3 & 4 17

18. BD35 15/B/1 & 2 18

19. BD37 16/A/3 & 4 19


20. BD39 16/B/1 & 2 20

21. BD41 17/A/3 & 4 21

22. BD43 17/B/1 & 2 22


23. BD45 18/A/3 & 4 23

24. BD47 18/B/1 & 2 24

25. BD49 19/A/3 & 4 25


26. BD51 19/B/1 & 2 26

27. BD53 20/A/3 & 4 27

28. BD55 20/B/1 & 2 28

29. BD57 21/A/3 & 4 29

30. BD59 21/B/1 & 2 30

31. BD61 22/A/3 & 4 31

32. BD63 22/B/1 & 2 32

INSTALLATION MANUAL 223


Chapter 10.

Table 10.23 Contd.


BUS1 (BTU1)
Sl. No. Cable No. (BDXX) Source (CM Side) Destination (BM Side)
Frame No. :4 Frame No. : 6

Slot/Connector Tab to be retained Slot/Connector/ : 14/A


Tab to be retained : 2 &3:

BM No.

1. BD02 5/A/3 & 4 1

2. BD04 5/B/1 & 2 2

3. BD06 6/A/3 & 4 3


4. BD08 6/B/1 & 2 4

5. BD10 7/A/3 & 4 5

6. BD12 7/B/1 & 2 6


7. BD14 8/A/3 & 4 7

8. BD16 8/B/1 & 2 8


9. BD18 9/A/3 & 4 9
10. BD20 9/B/1 & 2 10

11. BD22 10/A/3 & 4 11

12. BD24 10/B/1 & 2 12


13. BD26 11/A/3 & 4 13

14. BD28 11/B/1 & 2 14

15. BD30 12/A/3 & 4 15


16. BD32 12/B/1 & 2 16

17. BD34 15/A/3 & 4 17

18. BD36 15/B/1 & 2 18

19. BD38 16/A/3 & 4 19


20. BD40 16/B/1 & 2 20

21. BD42 17/A/3 & 4 21

22. BD44 17/B/1 & 2 22


23. BD46 18/A/3 & 4 23

24. BD48 18/B/1 & 2 24

25. BD50 19/A/3 & 4 25


26. BD52 19/B/1 & 2 26

27. BD54 20/A/3 & 4 27

28. BD56 20/B/1 & 2 28

29. BD58 21/A/3 & 4 29

30. BD60 21/B/1 & 2 30

31. BD62 22/A/3 & 4 31

32. BD64 22/B/1 & 2 32

224 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

10.6.10. Detail of BM-CM Clock Cable


CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXXBCNN-000

DRAWING NO. : Fig. 10.46 (a) & 10.46 (b)

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-CX0188AU-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : BCNN*

CABLE SPECIFICATION : RG-188 A/u 50 j (ohm) coaxial cable

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE :-

CABLE LENGTH : 20 mtrs

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCC-BPSCB207-XXX


MCC-BPPOH207-XXX

DESTINATION TERMINATION NO. : Same as source termination part No.

SOURCE : As per Table 10.24

DESTINATION : As per Table 10.24

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Refer Fig. 10.46 (b)

* NN varies from 01 to 64 for BM 1 to BM 32 (for each BM there are two


cables for Bus0 and Bus1).

INSTALLATION MANUAL 225


Chapter 10.

226 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 227


Chapter 10.

Table 10.24
BM-CM CLOCK CABLES
BUS0 (BTU0)
Sl. No. Cable No. (BDXX) Source (CM Side) Destination (BM Side)
Frame No. :1 Frame No. :6
Slot No. : 12
Slot Connector
Connector : B
No. B Tab Position :1
Tab Position
BM No.
1. BC01 5 B3 1
2. BC03 5 B4 2
3. BC05 6 B3 3
4. BC07 6 B4 4
5. BC09 7 B3 5
6. BC11 7 B4 6
7. BC13 8 B3 7
8. BC15 8 B4 8
9. BC17 9 B3 9
10. BC19 9 B4 10
11. BC21 10 B3 11
12. BC23 10 B4 12
13. BC25 11 B3 13
14. BC27 11 B4 14
15. BC29 12 B3 15
16. BC31 12 B4 16
17. BC33 15 B3 17
18. BC35 15 B4 18
19. BC37 16 B3 19
20. BC39 16 B4 20
21. BC41 17 B3 21
22. BC43 17 B4 22
23. BC45 18 B3 23
24. BC47 18 B4 24
25. BC49 19 B3 25
26. BC51 19 B4 26
27. BC53 20 B3 27
28. BC55 20 B4 28
29. BC57 21 B3 29
30. BC59 21 B4 30
31. BC61 22 B3 31
32. BC63 22 B4 32

228 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

BUS1 (BTU1)
Sl. No. Cable No. (BDXX) Source (CM Side) Destination (BM Side)
Frame No. :1 Frame No. :6
Slot Connector Slot No. : 12
No. B Connector : B
Tab Position Tab Position :1

BM No.
1. BD02 5 B3 1

2. BD04 5 B4 2

3. BD06 6 B3 3
4. BD08 6 B4 4

5. BD10 7 B3 5

6. BD12 7 B4 6

7. BD14 8 B3 7
8. BD16 8 B4 8

9. BD18 9 B3 9
10. BD20 9 B4 10

11. BD22 10 B3 11

12. BD24 10 B4 12
13. BD26 11 B3 13

14. BD28 11 B4 14

15. BD30 12 B3 15
16. BD32 12 B4 16
17. BD34 15 B3 17

18. BD36 15 B4 18

19. BD38 16 B3 19
20. BD40 16 B4 20

21. BD42 17 B3 21

22. BD44 17 B4 22
23. BD46 18 B3 23

24. BD48 18 B4 24

25. BD50 19 B3 25

26. BD52 19 B4 26
27. BD54 20 B3 27

28. BD56 20 B4 28
29. BD58 21 B3 29

30. BD60 21 B4 30

31. BD62 22 B3 31

32. BD64 22 B4 32

INSTALLATION MANUAL 229


Chapter 10.

10.6.11. Digital Cable For RSU

For each RSU, eight digital Trunk cables (4 for bus-0 and 4 for bus-1) are
required on CM-XL side and cables in each bus are tied together as shown in
Fig. 10.47 (a) and 10.47 (b). These cables are required only when RSUs are to
be parented to MAX-XL.
10.6.11.1. Detail of Digital Trunk Cable (For RSU Link)
C-DOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXRMDXX-000

DRAWING NO. : Fig. 10.47 (a) & 10.47 (b)

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCTPS04-401 MCA-PVCSC013-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : M`N' `uu', M`N' `vv',


M`N' `xx', M`N' `yy'
Where N = A for Bus 0
B for Bus 1
Refer Table No. 10.25 for uu, vv, xx, yy.

CABLE DESCRIPTION : Shielded digital cable 4 pairs.


32/0.2mm black colour PVC wire.

CABLE UNIT COLOR CODE : GREY.

CABLE LENGTH : * Digital cable - 4x25 m. excluding unsheathed


section
# Ground cable - 0.3 m

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : Wire Wrap Contact block.


MCC-BCFSW307-002
Polarised Hood 14 contact Module.
MCC-BPPOH207-401

DESTINATION TERMINATION PART : Digital cables - stripped wire to MDF


NO. # Ring Terminal 2.5sq. mm/M6.
MCT-ERRIN015-401
# 32/0.2 mm. PVC wire, black
(MCA-PVCSC013-401) 0.3m in length

SOURCE PLACEMENT : Frame - BTU 0/1 in CM-XL.


Slot - ESM slot
Connector - B

TAB NO. RETAINED : TAB NO. - 1 For Module1


2 For Module 2

DESTINATION PLACEMENT : MDF


Refer fig. 10.47 (a) & 10.47 (b) and table 10.25
& 10.26.

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Wire Wrapping

230 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 231


Chapter 10.

232 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

Note :
* The exact length of the digital cable from exchange to MDF is site
dependent. Care should be taken so that total length of the cable from
exchange to first repeater position should not exceed more than
hundred metres.
# These parts are required to be connected as shown in Fig. 10.47 (a) &
10.47 (b).
Connections for Digital Trunk Cable CM-XL end (using 4 pair cable)
Table 10.25
Cable No.'s for Different RBM No.'s
RBM No. uu vv xx yy

02 01 02 03 04

04 05 06 07 08

06 09 10 11 12

08 13 14 15 16

10 17 18 19 20

12 21 22 23 24

14 25 26 27 28

16 29 30 31 32

18 33 34 35 36

20 37 38 39 40

22 41 42 43 44

24 45 46 47 48

26 49 50 51 52

28 53 54 55 56

30 57 58 59 60

32 61 62 63 64

INSTALLATION MANUAL 233


Chapter 10.

Table 10.26
Module No. Pin No. `A' `B' `C'

1 Blue (uu) -- White (uu) [Bl]

2 Orange (uu) -- White (uu) [O]

1 3 Green (uu) -- White (uu) [G]

4 Brown (uu) -- White (uu) [Br]

5 Blue (vv) -- White (vv) [Bl]

6 Orange (vv) Brown (vv) White (vv) [O]

7 Green (vv) White (vv) [Br] White (vv) [G]

1 Blue (xx) -- White (uu) [Bl]

2 Orange (xx) -- White (uu) [O]

2 3 Green (xx) -- White (uu) [G]

4 Brown (xx) -- White (uu) [Br]

5 Blue (yy) -- White (vv) [Bl]

6 Orange (yy) Brown (vv) White (vv) [O]

7 Green (yy) White (vv) [Br] White (vv) [G]

Note :
i) For the values of uu, vv, xx and yy for different BMs please see table
No. 10.25.
() indicates cable number
[] indicates corresponding cable colour pair
Bl : Blue
O : Orange
G : Green
Br : Brown
2) This cable assembly procedure is given in detail in RSU installation
manual also.

234 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

10.6.12. Reference Clock Cable (RCLK) for CM-XL

In CM-XL, there can be maximum three Reference Clock input per copy of
NSC. Clock is extended from DTS card (which is connected to a working PCM
stream connected to exchange supply of Reference Clock) and given to each
copy of NSC by splitting at the CM end. Corresponding DTS slots on DTU
mother board should be assembled with shrouds, latch frames and latches at
site.
Detail of Reference Clock Cable
C-DOT ASSY. NO. : ACB-NSCERCKN-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.47 (c) & 10.47 (d)

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCTPS04-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : RCKN

CABLE DESCRIPTION : SHIELDED DIGITAL CABLE 4 PAIRS


32/0.2MM GREY PVC

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : GREY

CABLE LENGTH : 12 MTRS. (MAX.)

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCC-BPWCB207-401

DESTINATION TERMINATION PART : MCC-BPWCB207-401


NO.

SOURCE PLACEMENT TAB NO. : REF. TABLE 10.26 (a)


RETAINED

DESTINATION PLACEMENT TAB : REF. TABLE 10.26 (a)


NO.RETAINED REF. TABLE 10.26 (a)

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : WIRE WRAP TOOL

INSTALLATION MANUAL 235


236
Chapter 10.

CABLE UNIT MARKER

N VARIES FROM 0 TO 2

\DESIGN\DSSMAX\MAX-XL\MAX-XLIM\MXI-RCC

C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

\DESIGN\DSSMAX\MAX-XL\MAX-XLIM\MXI-RCCC

INSTALLATION MANUAL 237


Chapter 10.

Table 10.26 (a)


Reference Clock Cable (RCK) Routing
S.No. Cable No. Source BM Side Frame Destination: CM Side Length Remarks
Frame-DTU Frame No.5

01. RCK0 SLOT:4,8,18 OR 22 CONNECTOR-J27 12 MTRS.


CONNECTOR `B' TAB (NSC-0) & J46
TO RETAIN-3 (NSC-1) TAB TO
RETAIN-1

02. RCK1 SLOT:4,8,18 OR 22 CONNECTOR-J27 12 MTRS.


CONNECTOR `B' TAB (NSC-0) & J46
TO RETAIN-3 (NSC-1) TAB TO
RETAIN-2

03. RCK2 SLOT:4,8,18 OR 22 CONNECTOR-J27 12 MTRS.


CONNECTOR `B' TAB (NSC-0) & J46
TO RETAIN-3 (NSC-1) TAB TO
RETAIN-3

Note :
See Fig. 10.47 (c) & 10.47 (d)

10.6.13. CM Intra-Rack Cables

In this section all the internal cables of CM-XL are briefly covered as
assembly of these cables are done and routed within CM-XL at factory.
Number of cables for each type is given in tables 10.27 to 10.43 and the
routing diagrams for these cables are given in figures 10.48 to 10.62. For
assembly of these CM-XL Internal Cables, Assembly Instructions and
corresponding drawings supplied alongwith system engineering documents
shall be referred.
ADDRESS, DATA & CONTROL BUS CABLE ROUTING

238 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

TABLE 10.27
SL. No. CABLE NO. CABLE PART SOURCE DESTINATION LENGTH REMARKS
NUMBER PLACEMENT PLACEMENT
FRAME/ FRAME/
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR

1 AD01 ACB-CMXLAD01-001 5/J33 5/J41 08 Cms

2 AD02 ACB-CMXLAD02-001 5/J34 5/J42 08 Cms.

3 AD03 ACB-CMXLAD03-001 6/J22 6/J30 08 Cms.

4 AD04 ACB-CMXLAD04-001 6/J23 6/J31 08 Cms.

5 DA01 ACB-CMXLDA01-001 5/J35 5/J43 08 Cms.

6 DA02 ACB-CMXLDA02-001 6/J24 6/J32 08 Cms.

7 CR01 ACB-CMXLCR01-001 5/J36 5/J44 08 Cms.

8 CR02 ACB-CMXLCR02-001 6/J25 6/J33 08 Cms.

Note :
See Fig. 10.48 for Cable routing.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 239


Chapter 10.

240 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

TABLE 10.28
CHASSIS GND CABLE ROUTING
SL. No. CABLE NO. CABLE PART NUMBER SOURCE DESTINATION LENGTH REMARKS
PLACEMENT PLACEMENT
FRAME/SLOT/ FRAME/SLOT/
CONNECTOR/ CONNECTOR/
POSITION/NUMB POSITION/NUMBER
ER

1 CG01 ACB-CMXLCG01-001 CF/1/S/-/03 1/--/FT/-/01 16 Cms.

2 CG02 ACB-CMXLCG02-001 CF/1/S/-/07 1/--/FT/-/06 16 Cms.

3 CG03 ACB-CMXLCG03-001 CF/1/S/-/07 CF/2/S/-/06 28 Cms.

4 CG04 ACB-CMXLCG04-001 CF/2/S/-/03 2/--/FT/-/01 16 Cms.

5 CG05 ACB-CMXLCG05-001 CF/2/S/-/07 2/--/FT/-/06 16 Cms.

6 CG06 ACB-CMXLCG06-001 CF/2/S/-/07 CF/3/S/-/06 28 Cms.

7 CG07 ACB-CMXLCG07-001 CF/3/S/-/03 3/--/FT/-/01 16 Cms.

8 CG08 ACB-CMXLCG08-001 CF/3/S/-/07 3/--/FT/-/06 16 Cms.

9 CG09 ACB-CMXLCG09-001 CF/3/S/-/07 CF/4/S/-/06 28 Cms.

10 CG10 ACB-CMXLCG10-001 CF/4/S/-/03 4/--/FT/-/01 16 Cms.

11 CG11 ACB-CMXLCG11-001 CF/4/S/-/07 4/--/FT/-/06 16 Cms.

12 CG12 ACB-CMXLCG12-001 CF/4/S/-/07 CF/5/S/-/06 28 Cms.

13 CG13 ACB-CMXLCG13-001 CF/5/S/-/03 5/--/FT/-/01 16 Cms

14 CG14 ACB-CMXLCG14-001 CF/5/S/-/07 5/--/FT/-/06 16 Cms

15 CG15 ACB-CMXLCG15-001 CF/5/S/-/07 CF/6/S/-/06 28 Cms.

16 CG16 ACB-CMXLCG16-001 CF/6/S/-/03 6/--/FT/-/02 16 Cms.

17 CG17 ACB-CMXLCG17-001 CF/6/S/-/07 6/--/FT/-/08 16 Cms.

Note :
CF/1/S/-/03 - Screw 3 of Card frame 1
1/--/FT/-/01 - Fast-on-tab 1 of frame 1
See Fig. 10.49 for Cable routing.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 241


Chapter 10.

242 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

TABLE 10.29
16 MHz CLOCK CABLES ROUTING
SL. No. CABLE NO. CABLE PART SOURCE DESTINATION LENGTH REMARKS
NUMBER PLACEMENT PLACEMENT
FRAME/ FRAME/SLOT/
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR/
POSITION/NUMBER

1 CK01 ACB-CMXLCK01-000 5/J13 2/04/A/J/01 280 Cms

2 CK02 ACB-CMXLCK02-000 5/J5 1/04/B/J/05 280 Cms.

3 CK03 ACB-CMXLCK03-000 5/J14 1/04/B/J/06 280 Cms.

4 CK04 ACB-CMXLCK04-000 5/J6 1/24/B/J/06 280 Cms.

5 CK05 ACB-CMXLCK05-000 5/J15 2/04/A/J/02 280 Cms.

6 CK06 ACB-CMXLCK06-000 5/J7 1/24/B/J/05 280 Cms.

7 CK07 ACB-CMXLCK07-000 5/J18 4/24/B/J/05 280 Cms.

8 CK08 ACB-CMXLCK08-000 5/J10 4/04/B/J/05 280 Cms.

9 CK09 ACB-CMXLCK09-000 5/J19 4/04/B/J/06 280 Cms.

10 CK10 ACB-CMXLCK10-000 5/J11 3/04/A/J/02 280 Cms.

11 CK11 ACB-CMXLCK11-000 5/J20 4/24/B/J/06 280 Cms.

12 CK12 ACB-CMXLCK12-000 5/J12 3/04/A/J/01 280 Cms.

13 CK13 ACB-CMXLCK13-000 5/J57 2/24/A/J/01 320 Cms.

14 CK14 ACB-CMXLCK14-000 5/J65 1/04/A/J/01 280 Cms

15 CK15 ACB-CMXLCK15-000 5/J58 1/04/A/J/02 280 Cms.

16 CK16 ACB-CMXLCK16-000 5/J66 1/24/A/J/02 280 Cms.

17 CK17 ACB-CMXLCK17-000 5/J59 2/24/A/J/02 320 Cms.

18 CK18 ACB-CMXLCK18-000 5/J67 1/24/A/J/01 280 Cms.

19 CK19 ACB-CMXLCK19-000 5/J62 4/24/A/J/01 280 Cms.

20 CK20 ACB-CMXLCK20-000 5/J70 4/04/A/J/01 280 Cms.

21 CK21 ACB-CMXLCK21-000 5/J63 4/04/A/J/02 280 Cms.

22 CK22 ACB-CMXLCK22-000 5/J71 3/24/A/J/02 320 Cms.

23 CK23 ACB-CMXLCK23-000 5/J64 4/24/A/J/02 280 Cms.

24 CK24 ACB-CMXLCK24-000 5/J72 3/24/A/J/01 320 Cms.

25 CK25 ACB-CMXLCK25-000 5/J28 5/J45 70 Cms Xchange


Clock 0

26 CK26 ACB-CMXLCK26-000 5/J47 5/J26 70 Cms. Xchange


Clock 1

Note : See Fig. 10.50 for Cable routing.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 243


Chapter 10.

244 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

TABLE 10.30
DIRECT LINK CABLE ROUTING
SL. No. CABLE NO. CABLE PART SOURCE DESTINATION LENGTH REMARKS
NUMBER PLACEMENT PLACEMENT IN
FRAME/ FRAME/ CENTI-
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR METERS

1 DL01 ACB-CMXLDL01-001 6/J3 6/J48 60 Cms.

2 DL02 ACB-CMXLDL02-001 6/J14 6/J37 60 Cms.

3 DL03 ACB-CMXLDL03-001 6/J8 5/J49 60 Cms.

4 DL04 ACB-CMXLDL04-001 6/J7 5/J32 60 Cms.

5 DL05 ACB-CMXLDL05-001 6/J18 5/J29 60 Cms.

6 DL06 ACB-CMXLDL06-001 6/J44 5/J31 60 Cms.

7 DL07 ACB-CMXLDL07-001 6/J34 5/J30 60 Cms.

8 DL08 ACB-CMXLDL08-001 6/J35 5/J51 60 Cms.

9 DL09 ACB-CMXLDL09-001 6/J19 5/J50 60 Cms.

10 DL10 ACB-CMXLDL10-001 6/J45 5/J48 60 Cms.

Note : See Fig. 10.51 for Cable routing.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 245


Chapter 10.

246 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

TABLE 10.31
EXCHANGE BUS CABLE ROUTING
SL. No. CABLE NO. CABLE PART SOURCE DESTINATION LENGTH REMARKS
NUMBER PLACEMENT PLACEMENT
FRAME/SLOT/ FRAME/SLOT/
CONNECTOR/ CONNECTOR/
POSITION/NUMBER POSITION/NUMBER
1 EB01 ACB-CMXLEB01-000 2/05/J/-/03 3/05/J/-/01 30 Cms.

2 EB02 ACB-CMXLEB02-000 3/05/J/-/03 2/05/J/-/01 50 Cms.

3 EB03 ACB-CMXLEB03-000 2/06/J/-/03 3/06/J/-/01 30 Cms.

4 EB04 ACB-CMXLEB04-000 3/06/J/-/03 2/06/J/-/01 50 Cms.

5 EB05 ACB-CMXLEB05-000 2/07/J/-/03 3/07/J/-/01 30 Cms.

6 EB06 ACB-CMXLEB06-000 3/07/J/-/03 2/07/J/-/01 50 Cms.


7 EB07 ACB-CMXLEB07-000 2/08/J/-/03 3/08/J/-/01 30 Cms.

8 EB08 ACB-CMXLEB08-000 3/08/J/-/03 2/08/J/-/01 50 Cms.

9 EB09 ACB-CMXLEB09-000 2/09/J/-/03 3/09/J/-/01 30 Cms.


10 EB10 ACB-CMXLEB10-000 3/09/J/-/03 2/09/J/-/01 50 Cms.
11 EB11 ACB-CMXLEB11-000 2/10/J/-/03 3/10/J/-/01 30 Cms.

12 EB12 ACB-CMXLEB12-000 3/10/J/-/03 2/10/J/-/01 50 Cms.

13 EB13 ACB-CMXLEB13-000 2/11/J/-/03 3/11/J/-/01 30 Cms.


14 EB14 ACB-CMXLEB14-000 3/11/J/-/03 2/11/J/-/01 50 Cms.
15 EB15 ACB-CMXLEB15-000 2/12/J/-/03 3/12/J/-/01 30 Cms.

16 EB16 ACB-CMXLEB16-000 3/12/J/-/03 2/12/J/-/01 50 Cms.

17 EB17 ACB-CMXLEB17-000 2/15/J/-/03 3/15/J/-/01 30 Cms.


18 EB18 ACB-CMXLEB18-000 3/15/J/-/03 2/15/J/-/01 50 Cms.

19 EB19 ACB-CMXLEB19-000 2/16/J/-/03 3/16/J/-/01 30 Cms.


20 EB20 ACB-CMXLEB20-000 3/16/J/-/03 2/16/J/-/01 50 Cms.

21 EB21 ACB-CMXLEB21-000 2/17/J/-/03 3/17/J/-/01 30 Cms.

22 EB22 ACB-CMXLEB22-000 3/17/J/-/03 2/17/J/-/01 50 Cms.

23 EB23 ACB-CMXLEB23-000 2/18/J/-/03 3/18/J/-/01 30 Cms.


24 EB24 ACB-CMXLEB24-000 3/18/J/-/03 2/18/J/-/01 50 Cms.

25 EB25 ACB-CMXLEB25-000 2/19/J/-/03 3/19/J/-/01 30 Cms.


26 EB26 ACB-CMXLEB26-000 3/19/J/-/03 2/19/J/-/01 50 Cms.

27 EB27 ACB-CMXLEB27-000 2/20/J/-/03 3/20/J/-/01 30 Cms.

28 EB28 ACB-CMXLEB28-000 3/20/J/-/03 2/20/J/-/01 50 Cms.

29 EB29 ACB-CMXLEB29-000 2/21/J/-/03 3/21/J/-/01 30 Cms.

30 EB30 ACB-CMXLEB30-000 3/21/J/-/03 2/21/J/-/01 50 Cms.


31 EB31 ACB-CMXLEB31-000 2/22/J/-/03 3/22/J/-/01 30 Cms.

32 EB32 ACB-CMXLEB32-000 3/22/J/-/03 2/22/J/-/01 50 Cms.

Note : See Fig. 10.52 for Cable routing.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 247


Chapter 10.

248 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

TABLE 10.32
ERROR & CONTROL CABLE ROUTING
SL. No. CABLE NO. CABLE PART SOURCE DESTINATION LENGTH REMARKS
NUMBER PLACEMENT PLACEMENT
FRAME/SLOT/ FRAME/SLOT/
CONNECTOR/ CONNECTOR/
POSITION/NUMBER POSITION/NUMBER
1 EC01 ACB-CMXLEC01-000 2/02/A/4/- 1/02/B/2/- 75 Cms. Coding to be
retained
according to
position
marked
2 EC02 ACB-CMXLEC02-000 2/02/A/3/- 1/02/B/1/- 80 Cms.
3 EC03 ACB-CMXLEC03-000 2/02/A/2/- 1/02/A/2/- 89 Cms.
4 EC04 ACB-CMXLEC04-000 2/02/A/1/- 1/02/A/1/- 92 Cms.
5 EC05 ACB-CMXLEC05-000 2/26/A/4/- 1/26/B/4/- 64 Cms.
6 EC06 ACB-CMXLEC06-000 2/26/A/3/- 1/26/B/3/- 66 Cms.
7 EC07 ACB-CMXLEC07-000 2/26/A/2/- 1/26/A/4/- 85 Cms.
8 EC08 ACB-CMXLEC08-000 2/26/A/1/- 1/26/A/3/- 82 Cms.
9 EC09 ACB-CMXLEC09-000 2/02/B/4/- 1/26/A/2/- 144 Cms.
10 EC10 ACB-CMXLEC10-000 2/02/B/3/- 1/26/A/1/- 150 Cms.
11 EC11 ACB-CMXLEC11-000 2/02/B/2/- 1/26/B/2/- 136 Cms.
12 EC12 ACB-CMXLEC12-000 2/02/B/1/- 1/26/B/1/- 142 Cms.
13 EC13 ACB-CMXLEC13-000 2/26/B/4/- 1/02/A/4/- 140 Cms.
14 EC14 ACB-CMXLEC14-000 2/26/B/3/- 1/02/A/3/- 144 Cms.
15 EC15 ACB-CMXLEC15-000 2/26/B/2/- 1/02/B/4/- 132 Cms.
16 EC16 ACB-CMXLEC16-000 2/26/B/1/- 1/02/B/3/- 136 Cms.
17 EC17 ACB-CMXLEC17-000 3/02/A/4/- 4/02/B/2/- 78 Cms.
18 EC18 ACB-CMXLEC18-000 3/02/A/3/- 4/02/B/1/- 80 Cms.
19 EC19 ACB-CMXLEC19-000 3/02/A/2/- 4/02/A/2/- 94 Cms.
20 EC20 ACB-CMXLEC20-000 3/02/A/1/- 4/02/A/1/- 98 Cms.
21 EC21 ACB-CMXLEC21-000 3/26/A/4/- 4/26/B/4/- 62 Cms.
22 EC22 ACB-CMXLEC22-000 3/26/A/3/- 4/26/B/3/- 68 Cms.
23 EC23 ACB-CMXLEC23-000 3/26/A/2/- 4/26/A/4/- 82 Cms.
24 EC24 ACB-CMXLEC24-000 3/26/A/1/- 4/26/A/3/- 84 Cms.
25 EC25 ACB-CMXLEC25-000 3/02/B/4/- 4/26/A/2/- 138 Cms.
26 EC26 ACB-CMXLEC26-000 3/02/B/3/- 4/26/A/1/- 142 Cms.
27 EC27 ACB-CMXLEC27-000 3/02/B/2/- 4/26/B/2/- 130 Cms.
28 EC28 ACB-CMXLEC28-000 3/02/B/1/- 4/26/B/1/- 136 Cms.
29 EC29 ACB-CMXLEC29-000 3/26/B/4/- 4/02/A/4/- 142 Cms.
30 EC30 ACB-CMXLEC30-000 3/26/B/3/- 4/02/A/3/- 146 Cms.
31 EC31 ACB-CMXLEC31-000 3/26/B/2/- 4/02/B/4/- 134 Cms.
32 EC32 ACB-CMXLEC32-000 3/26/B/1/- 4/02/B/3/- 138 Cms.

Note : See Figs. 10.53 & 10.54 for Cable routing.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 249


Chapter 10.

250 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 251


Chapter 10.

TABLE 10.33
ERROR CABLE ROUTING
SL. No. CABLE NO. CABLE PART SOURCE DESTINATION LENGTH REMARKS
NUMBER PLACEMENT PLACEMENT
FRAME/SLOT/ FRAME/SLOT/
CONNECTOR/ CONNECTOR/
POSITION/NUMBER POSITION/NUMBER
1 ER01 ACB-CMXLER01-000 BUS BAR (RED) 0V FB/01/J/-/02 12 Cms. All three
POSITIVE cables are of
red colour

2 ER02 ACB-CMXLER02-000 FB/01/J/-/03 FB/02/J/-/02 12 Cms.

3 ER03 ACB-CMXLER03-000 FB/02/J/-/03 FB/05/J/-/02 09 Cms.

4 ER04 ACB-CMXLER04-000 FB/05/J/-/03 FB/06/J/-/02 12 Cms.

5 ER05 ACB-CMXLER05-000 FB/06/J/-/03 FB/09/J/-/02 09 Cms.

6 ER06 ACB-CMXLER06-000 FB/09/J/-/03 FB/10/J/-/02 12 Cms.


7 ER07 ACB-CMXLER07-000 FB/10/J/-/03 FB/13/J/-/02 09 Cms.

8 ER08 ACB-CMXLER08-000 FB/13/J/-/03 FB/14/J/-/02 12 Cms.


9 ER09 ACB-CMXLER09-000 FB/14/J/-/03 FB/17/J/-/02 09 Cms.
10 ER10 ACB-CMXLER10-000 FB/17/J/-/03 FB/18/J/-/02 12 Cms.
11 ER11 ACB-CMXLER11-000 FB/18/J/-/03 FB/21/J/-/02 09 Cms.

12 ER12 ACB-CMXLER12-000 FB/21/J/-/03 FB/22/J/-/02 12 Cms.

13 ER13 ACB-CMXLER13-000 FB/22/J/-/03 6/12/AB/W/01 100 Cms. This cable is


single cable
6/12/AB/W/02 6/11/AB/W/01 25 Cms. with multiple
connectors in
a daisy chain
function
6/11/AB/W/01 5/12/AB/W/01 150 Cms.

5/12/AB/W/01 5/06/AB/W/01 60 Cms.

5/06/AB/W/02 4/04/B/J/04 130 Cms.


14 ER14 ACB-CMXLER14-000 4/04/B/J/03 4/04/A/J/04 60 Cms.
15 ER15 ACB-CMXLER15-000 4/04/A/J/03 3/05/AB/J/02 130 Cms.

16 ER16 ACB-CMXLER16-000 3/05/AB/J/01 3/04/A/J/04 60 Cms.


17 ER17 ACB-CMXLER17-000 3/04/A/J/03 2/05/AB/J/02 130 Cms.

18 ER18 ACB-CMXLER18-000 2/05/AB/J/01 2/04/A/J/04 60 Cms.

19 ER19 ACB-CMXLER19-000 2/04/A/J/03 1/04/B/J/04 130 Cms.


20 ER20 ACB-CMXLER20-000 1/04/B/J/03 1/04/A/J/04 60 Cms.

21 ER21 ACB-CMXLER21-000 BUSBAR (RED) FB/03/J/-/02 12 Cms.


COPY 1 OV
POSITIVE

22 ER22 ACB-CMXLER22-000 FB/03/J/-/03 FB/04/J/-/02 12 Cms.

23 ER23 ACB-CMXLER23-000 FB/04/J/-/03 FB/07/J/-/02 09 Cms.


24 ER24 ACB-CMXLER24-000 FB/07/J/-/03 FB/08/J/-/02 12 Cms.

25 ER25 ACB-CMXLER25-000 FB/08/J/-/03 FB/11/J/-/02 09 Cms.

26 ER26 ACB-CMXLER26-000 FB/11/J/-/03 FB/12/J/-/02 12 Cms.

252 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

SL. No. CABLE NO. CABLE PART SOURCE DESTINATION LENGTH REMARKS
NUMBER PLACEMENT PLACEMENT
FRAME/SLOT/ FRAME/SLOT/
CONNECTOR/ CONNECTOR/
POSITION/NUMBER POSITION/NUMBER

27 ER27 ACB-CMXLER27-000 FB/12/J/-/03 FB/15/J/-/02 09 Cms

28 ER28 ACB-CMXLER28-000 FB/15/J/-/03 FB/16/J/-/02 12 Cms

29 ER29 ACB-CMXLER29-000 FB/16/J/-/03 FB/19/J/-/02 09 Cms.

30 ER30 ACB-CMXLER30-000 FB/19/J/-/03 FB/20/J/-/02 12 Cms.


31 ER31 ACB-CMXLER31-000 FB/20/J/-/03 FB/23/J/-/02 09 Cms.
32 ER32 ACB-CMXLER32-000 FB/23/J/-/03 FB/24/J/-/02 12 Cms.

33 ER33 ACB-CMXLER33-000 FB/24/J/-/03 6/15/AB/W/01 100 Cms. This is single


cable assy
6/15/AB/W/02 6/16/AB/W/01 25 Cms. with multiple
connect ion in
a daisy chain
fashion

6/16/AB/W/02 5/15/AB/W/01 150 Cms.


5/15/AB/W/02 5/21/AB/W/01 60 Cms.
5/21/AB/J/02 4/24/B/J/04 130 Cms.
34 ER34 ACB-CMXLER34-000 4/24/B/J/03 4/24/A/J/04 60 Cms.

35 ER35 ACB-CMXLER35-000 4/24/A/J/03 3/22/AB/J/02 130 Cms.

36 ER36 ACB-CMXLER36-000 3/22/AB/J/01 3/24/A/J/04 60 Cms.


37 ER37 ACB-CMXLER37-000 3/24/A/J/03 2/22/AB/J/02 130 Cms.

38 ER38 ACB-CMXLER38-000 2/22/AB/J/01 2/24/A/J/04 60 Cms.


39 ER39 ACB-CMXLER39-000 2/24/A/J/03 1/24/B/J/04 130 Cms.
40 ER40 ACB-CMXLER40-000 1/24/B/J/03 1/24/A/J/04 60 Cms.

41 ER41 ACB-CMXLER41-000 BUS BAR (RED) TH/FFB/J/-/27 150 Cms.


COPY1 0V
POSITIVE
42 ER42 ACB-CMXLER42-000 TH/FFB/J/-/12 TH/FFB/J/-/14 06 Cms.

43 ER43 ACB-CMXLER43-000 TH/FFB/J/-/13 TH/FFB/J/-/15 06 Cms.

44 ER44 ACB-CMXLER44-000 1/04/A/J/03 FUSE BLOWN 15 Cms TO FBI


INDICATOR ERROR (C0)

45 ER45 ACB-CMXLER45-000 1/24/A/J/03 FUSE BLOWN 15Cms TO FBI


INDICATOR ERROR (C1)

46 ER46 ACB-CMXLER46-000 TH/FFB/J/-/26 INDICATOR 15Cms TO FBI


ERROR(FAN

Note : See Fig. 10.55 for Cable routing.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 253


Chapter 10.

254 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

TABLE 10.34
FAN ERROR CABLE ROUTING
SL. No. CABLE NO. CABLE PART SOURCE DESTINATION LENGTH REMARKS
NUMBER PLACEMENT PLACEMENT
FRAME/ FRAME/SLOT/
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR/
POSITION/NUMBER
1 FE01 ACB-CMXLFE01-000 6/J1 TH/FFB/J/-/01 250 Cms T- Top Flat
Assy.

2 FE02 ACB-CMXLFE02- 6/J54 TH/FFB/J/-/28 250 Cms (EF.M.B)


000

Route the above cables along the side trough towards the top of the cabinet
and take a bend into the Top Panel. Then terminate the cables as per the
above table.
Note : TH/FFB/J/-/01 - Top hat Fan Failure Board Connector J1.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 255


Chapter 10.

TABLE 10.35
FAN CABLE ROUTING
SL. No. CABLE NO. ASSEMBLED CABLE SOURCE DESTINATION LENGTH REMARKS
FAN PART NUMBER PLACEMENT PLACEMENT
FRAME/SLOT/ FRAME/SLOT/
CONNECTOR/ CONNECTOR/
POSITION/NUMBER POSITION/NUMBER
1 FN01 ACB-CMXLFN01-000 TH/--/FN/-/01 TH/FFB/J/-/4 30 Cms.

2 FN02 ACB-CMXLFN02-000 TH/--/FN/-/02 TH/FFB/J/-/5 15 Cms.

3 FN03 ACB-CMXLFN03-000 TH/--/FN/-/03 TH/FFB/J/-/7 30 Cms.

4 FN04 ACB-CMXLFN04-000 TH/--/FN/-/04 TH/FFB/J/-/8 15 Cms.

5 FN05 ACB-CMXLFN05-000 TH/--/FN/-/05 TH/FFB/J/-/10 30 Cms.

6 FN06 ACB-CMXLFN06-000 TH/--/FN/-/06 TH/FFB/J/-/11 15 Cms

7 FN07 ACB-CMXLFN07-000 TH/--/FN/-/07 TH/FFB/J/-/17 30 Cms.

8 FN08 ACB-CMXLFN08-000 TH/--/FN/-/08 TH/FFB/J/-/18 15 Cms.

9 FN09 ACB-CMXLFN09-000 TH/--/FN/-/09 TH/FFB/J/-/20 30 Cms.

10 FN10 ACB-CMXLFN10-000 TH/--/FN/-/10 TH/FFB/J/-/21 15 Cms.

11 FN11 ACB-CMXLFN11-000 TH/--/FN/-/11 TH/FFB/J/-/23 30 Cms.

12 FN12 ACB-CMXLFN12-000 TH/--/FN/-/12 TH/FFB/J/-/24 15 Cms.

Note :
TH/--/FN/-/01 - Top hat Fan No.1 TH/FFB/J/-/4 - Top hat Fan Failure Board
J4 Connector REFER DOC.NO. DCM-XL0XXX00-000 (AD) UNDER
FUNCTIONAL CATEGORY FAN CABLE FOR ROUTING THE CABLES
For cable routing see Fig. 10.56

256 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 257


Chapter 10.

TABLE 10.36
BUS0_MUXD BUS CABLE ROUTING
SL. No. CABLE NO. CABLE PART SOURCE DESTINATION LENGTH REMARKS
NUMBER PLACEMENT PLACEMENT
FRAME/ FRAME/
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
1 MB01 ACB-CMXLMB01-000 1/J4 2/J8 90 Cms. Copy 0

2 MB02 ACB-CMXLMB02-000 1/J7 2/J9 87 Cms. Copy 0

3 MB03 ACB-CMXLMB03-000 1/J10 2/J10 79 Cms. Copy 0

4 MB04 ACB-CMXLMB04-000 1/J13 2/J11 75 Cms. Copy 0

5 MB05 ACB-CMXLMB05-000 1/J35 2/J15 109 Cms. Copy 0


6 MB06 ACB-CMXLMB06-000 1/J31 2/J14 101 Cms. Copy 0

7 MB07 ACB-CMXLMB07-000 1/J29 2/J13 91 Cms. Copy 0

8 MB08 ACB-CMXLMB08-000 1/J25 2/J12 83 Cms. Copy 0

9 MB09 ACB-CMXLMB09-000 1/J5 2/J18 88 Cms. Copy 1

10 MB10 ACB-CMXLMB10-000 1/J9 2/J19 85 Cms. Copy 1


11 MB11 ACB-CMXLMB11-000 1/J11 2/J20 83 Cms. Copy 1

12 MB12 ACB-CMXLMB12-000 1/J15 2/J21 77 Cms. Copy 1

13 MB13 ACB-CMXLMB13-000 1/J33 2/J25 106 Cms. Copy 1

14 MB14 ACB-CMXLMB14-000 1/J30 2/J24 96 Cms. Copy 1


15 MB15 ACB-CMXLMB15-000 1/J27 2/J23 87 Cms. Copy 1

16 MB16 ACB-CMXLMB16-000 1/J24 2/J22 75 Cms. Copy 1


17 MB17 ACB-CMXLMB17-000 4/J13 3/J11 55 Cms. Copy 0
18 MB18 ACB-CMXLMB18-000 4/J10 3/J10 57 Cms. Copy 0

19 MB19 ACB-CMXLMB19-000 4/J7 3/J9 64 Cms. Copy 0

20 MB20 ACB-CMXLMB20-000 4/J4 3/J8 73 Cms. Copy 0


21 MB21 ACB-CMXLMB21-000 4/J25 3/J12 53 Cms. Copy 0
22 MB22 ACB-CMXLMB22-000 4/J29 3/J13 58 Cms. Copy 0

23 MB23 ACB-CMXLMB23-000 4/J31 3/J14 66 Cms. Copy 0

24 MB24 ACB-CMXLMB24-000 4/J35 3/J15 66 Cms. Copy 0


25 MB25 ACB-CMXLMB25-000 4/J15 3/J21 53 Cms. Copy 1

26 MB26 ACB-CMXLMB26-000 4/J11 3/J20 58 Cms. Copy 1


27 MB27 ACB-CMXLMB27-000 4/J9 3/J19 69 Cms. Copy 1

28 MB28 ACB-CMXLMB28-000 4/J5 3/J18 77 Cms. Copy 1

29 MB29 ACB-CMXLMB29-000 4/J24 3/J22 53 Cms. Copy 1

30 MB30 ACB-CMXLMB30-000 4/J27 3/J23 53 Cms. Copy 1

31 MB31 ACB-CMXLMB31-000 4/J30 3/J24 53 Cms. Copy 1

32 MB32 ACB-CMXLMB32-000 4/J33 2/J25 53 Cms. Copy 1

Note : See Figs. 10.57 & 10.58 for Cable routing.

258 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 259


Chapter 10.

260 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

TABLE 10.37
SIGNAL : MESSAGE CLOCK & DATA CABLE ROUTING
SL. No. CABLE NO. CABLE PART SOURCE DESTINATION LENGTH REMARKS
NUMBER PLACEMENT PLACEMENT
FRAME/ FRAME/
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
1 MS01 ACB-CMXLMS01-001 6/J16 1/J6 240 Cms

2 MS02 ACB-CMXLMS02-001 6/J17 1/J8 240 Cms.

3 MS03 ACB-CMXLMS03-001 6/J12 1/J26 270 Cms.

4 MS04 ACB-CMXLMS04-001 6/J13 1/J28 270 Cms.

5 MS05 ACB-CMXLMS05-001 6/J15 1/J19 285 Cms.


6 MS06 ACB-CMXLMS06-001 6/J11 1/J23 285 Cms.

7 MS07 ACB-CMXLMS07-001 6/J4 1/J17 285 Cms.

8 MS08 ACB-CMXLMS08-001 6/J2 1/J21 285 Cms.

9 MS09 ACB-CMXLMS09-001 6/J9 1/J12 245 Cms.

10 MS10 ACB-CMXLMS10-001 6/J10 1/J14 245 Cms.


11 MS11 ACB-CMXLMS11-001 6/J5 1/J32 270 Cms.

12 MS12 ACB-CMXLMS12-001 6/J6 1/J34 270 Cms.

13 MS13 ACB-CMXLMS13-001 6/J39 4/J6 205 Cms.

14 MS14 ACB-CMXLMS14-001 6/J40 4/J8 205 Cms.


15 MS15 ACB-CMXLMS15-001 6/J42 4/J26 170 Cms.

16 MS16 ACB-CMXLMS16-001 6/J43 4/J28 170 Cms.


17 MS17 ACB-CMXLMS17-001 6/J38 4/J19 200 Cms.
18 MS18 ACB-CMXLMS18-001 6/J41 4/J23 200 Cms.

19 MS19 ACB-CMXLMS19-001 6/J49 4/J17 200 Cms.

20 MS20 ACB-CMXLMS20-001 6/J52 4/J21 200 Cms.


21 MS21 ACB-CMXLMS21-001 6/J46 4/J12 180 Cms.
22 MS22 ACB-CMXLMS22-001 6/J47 4/J14 180 Cms.

23 MS23 ACB-CMXLMS23-001 6/J50 4/J32 160 Cms.

24 MS24 ACB-CMXLMS24-001 6/J51 4/J34 160 Cms.

Note : See Fig. 10.59 (a) for Cable routing.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 261


Chapter 10.

262 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

TABLE 10.38
PSU Error Cable
SL. No. CABLE NO. CABLE PART SOURCE DESTINATION LENGTH REMARKS
NUMBER PLACEMENT PLACEMENT
FRAME/ FRAME/
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
1 PS 01 ACB-CMXLPS01-000 1/J1 1/J37 100 Cms.

2 PS 02 ACB-CMXLPS02-000 1/J2 1/J36 100 Cms.

3 PS 03 ACB-CMXLPS03-000 2/J1 2/J29 100 Cms.

4 PS 04 ACB-CMXLPS04-000 2/J2 2/J30 100 Cms.

5 PS 05 ACB-CMXLPS05-000 3/J1 3/J29 100 Cms.

6 PS 06 ACB-CMXLPS06-000 3/J2 3/J30 100 Cms

7 PS 07 ACB-CMXLPS07-000 4/J1 4/J37 100 Cms.

8 PS 08 ACB-CMXLPS08-000 4/J2 4/J36 100 Cms.

9 PS 09 ACB-CMXLPS09-000 5/J4 1/J3 160 Cms.

10 PS 10 ACB-CMXLPS10-000 5/J3 2/J3 140 Cms.

11 PS 11 ACB-CMXLPS11-000 5/J2 3/J3 110 Cms.

12 PS 12 ACB-CMXLPS12-000 5/J1 4/J3 85 Cms.

13 PS 13 ACB-CMXLPS13-000 5/J74 1/J38 160 Cms.

14 PS 14 ACB-CMXLPS14-000 5/J73 2/J28 125 Cms.

15 PS 15 ACB-CMXLPS15-000 5/J76 3/J28 105 Cms.

16 PS 16 ACB-CMXLPS16-000 5/J75 4/J38 75 Cms.

Refer Fig. 10.59 (b) for cable routing.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 263


Chapter 10.

264 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

TABLE 10.39
POWER CABLE ROUTING
SL. No. CABLE NO. ASSEMBLED CABLE SOURCE DESTINATION LENGTH REMARKS
FAN PART NUMBER PLACEMENT PLACEMENT
FRAME/SLOT/ FRAME/SLOT/
CONNECTOR/ CONNECTOR/
POSITION/NUMBER POSITION/NUMBER
1 PW01 ACB-CMXLPW01-001 FB/01/J/-/01 1/--/M/-/01 25 Cms.
2 PW02 ACB-CMXLPW02-001 FB/02/J/-/01 1/--/M/-/04 115 Cms.
3 PW03 ACB-CMXLPW03-001 FB/03/J/-/01 1/--/M/-/03 25 Cms.
4 PW04 ACB-CMXLPW04-001 FB/04/J/-/01 1/--/M/-/02 115 Cms.
5 PW05 ACB-CMXLPW05-001 FB/05/J/-/01 2/--/M/-/01 25 Cms.
6 PW06 ACB-CMXLPW06-001 FB/06/J/-/01 2/--/M/-/02 35 Cms.
7 PW07 ACB-CMXLPW07-001 FB/07/J/-/01 2/--/M/-/03 25 Cms.
8 PW08 ACB-CMXLPW08-001 FB/08/J/-/01 2/--/M/-/04 35 Cms.
9 PW09 ACB-CMXLPW09-001 FB/09/J/-/01 3/--/M/-/01 25 Cms.
10 PW10 ACB-CMXLPW10-001 FB/10/J/-/01 3/--/M/-/02 35 Cms.
11 PW11 ACB-CMXLPW11-001 FB/11/J/-/01 3/--/M/-/03 25 Cms.
12 PW12 ACB-CMXLPW12-001 FB/12/J/-/01 3/--/M/-/04 35 Cms.
13 PW13 ACB-CMXLPW13-001 FB/13/J/-/01 4/--/M/-/01 25 Cms.
14 PW14 ACB-CMXLPW14-001 FB/14/J/-/01 4/--/M/-/04 115 Cms.
15 PW15 ACB-CMXLPW15-001 FB/15/J/-/01 4/--/M/-/03 25 Cms.
16 PW16 ACB-CMXLPW16-001 FB/16/J/-/01 4/--/M/-/02 115 Cms.
17 PW17 ACB-CMXLPW17-001 FB/17/J/-/01 5/--/M/-/01 25 Cms.
18 PW18 ACB-CMXLPW18-001 FB/18/J/-/01 5/--/M/-/02 35 Cms.
19 PW19 ACB-CMXLPW19-001 FB/19/J/-/01 5/--/M/-/03 25 Cms.
20 PW20 ACB-CMXLPW20-001 FB/20/J/-/01 5/--/M/-/04 35 Cms.
21 PW21 ACB-CMXLPW21-001 FB/21/J/-/01 6/--/M/-/01 25 Cms.
22 PW22 ACB-CMXLPW22-001 FB/22/J/-/01 6/--/M/-/04 115 Cms.
23 PW23 ACB-CMXLPW23-001 FB/23/J/-/01 6/--/M/-/03 25 Cms.
24 PW24 ACB-CMXLPW24-001 FB/24/J/-/01 6/--/M/-/02 115 Cms.
25 PW25 ACB-CMXLPW25-001 C0 BUS BAR TH/FFB/J/-/02 100 Cms.
26 PW26 ACB-CMXLPW26-001 C1 BUS BAR TH/FFB/J/-/25 100 Cms.

Note :
FB/01/J/-/01 - J1 of Filter box 1 1/--/M/-/01 - M1 of Frame 1 (M.B) TH/FFB/J/-
/02 - J2 of Top hat FFB Card REFER DOC.NO. DCM-XL0XXX01-000 (AD)
UNDER FUNCTIONAL CATEGORY POWER CABLE FOR ROUTING THE
CABLES
See Fig. 10.60 (a) for cable routing.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 265


Chapter 10.

266 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

TABLE 10.40
SIGNAL : PROCESSOR BUS CABLE
SL. No. CABLE NO. CABLE PART SOURCE DESTINATION LENGTH REMARKS
NUMBER PLACEMENT PLACEMENT
FRAME/ FRAME/
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
1 PB01 ACB-CMXLPB01-000 5/J24 2/J6 220 Cms. ADDRESS 0

2 PB02 ACB-CMXLPB02-000 5/J23 2/J7 220 Cms. DATA 0

3 PB03 ACB-CMXLPB03-000 5/J22 3/J6 180 Cms. ADDRESS 1

4 PB04 ACB-CMXLPB04-000 5/J21 3/J7 180 Cms. DATA 1

5 PB05 ACB-CMXLPB05-000 5/J54 2/J17 220 Cms. ADDRESS 0

6 PB06 ACB-CMXLPB06-000 5/J53 2/J16 220 Cms. DATA 0

7 PB07 ACB-CMXLPB07-000 5/J56 3/J17 180 Cms. ADDRESS 1

8 PB08 ACB-CMXLPB08-000 5/J55 3/J16 180 Cms. DATA 1

Note : See Fig. 10.60 (b) for Cable routing.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 267


Chapter 10.

268 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

TABLE 10.41
SWITCHED BUS CABLE ROUTING
SL. No. CABLE NO. ASSEMBLED CABLE SOURCE DESTINATION LENGTH REMARKS
FAN PART NUMBER PLACEMENT PLACEMENT
FRAME/SLOT/ FRAME/SLOT/
CONNECTOR/ CONNECTOR/
POSITION/NUMBER POSITION/NUMBER
1 SB01 ACB-CMXLSB01-000 1/05/J/-/02 2/15/J/-/02 90 Cms.
1/06/J/-/02

2 SB02 ACB-CMXLSB02-000 1/08/J/-/02 2/16/J/-/02 85 Cms.

3 SB03 ACB-CMXLSB03-000 1/10/J/-/02 2/17/J/-/02 80 Cms.


1/11/J/-/02

4 SB04 ACB-CMXLSB04-000 1/12/J/-/02 2/18/J/-/02 75 Cms.


1/15/J/-/02

5 SB05 ACB-CMXLSB05-000 1/16/J/-/02 2/19/J/-/02 70 Cms.


1/17/J/-/02
6 SB06 ACB-CMXLSB06-000 1/18/J/-/02 2/20/J/-/02 65 Cms.
1/19/J/-/02

7 SB07 ACB-CMXLSB07-000 1/20/J/-/02 2/21/J/-/02 65 Cms.


1/21/J/-/02
8 SB08 ACB-CMXLSB08-000 1/22/J/-/02 2/22/J/-/02 50 Cms.
1/05/J/-/01

9 SB09 ACB-CMXLSB09-000 1/05/J/-/01 2/05/J/-/02 55 Cms.


1/06/J/-/01
10 SB10 ACB-CMXLSB10-000 1/08/J/-/01 2/06/J/-/02 70 Cms.
1/09/J/-/01
11 SB11 ACB-CMXLSB11-000 1/10/J/-/01 2/07/J/-/02 70 Cms.
1/11/J/-/01

12 SB12 ACB-CMXLSB12-000 1/11/J/-/01 2/08/J/-/02 75 Cms.


1/12/J/-/01
13 SB13 ACB-CMXLSB13-000 1/16/J/-/01 2/09/J/-/02 80 Cms.
1/17/J/-/01
14 SB14 ACB-CMXLSB14-000 1/18/J/-/01 2/10/J/-/02 85 Cms.
1/19/J/-/01
15 SB15 ACB-CMXLSB15-000 1/19/J/-/01 2/11/J/-/02 90 Cms.
1/20/J/-/01
16 SB16 ACB-CMXLSB16-000 1/22/J/-/01 2/12/J/-/02 95 Cms.
4/05/J/-/01
17 SB17 ACB-CMXLSB17-000 4/06/J/-/01 3/05/J/-/02 50 Cms.
4/07/J/-/01
18 SB18 ACB-CMXLSB18-000 4/08/J/-/01 3/06/J/-/02 65 Cms.
4/09/J/-/01
19 SB19 ACB-CMXLSB19-000 4/10/J/-/01 3/07/J/-/02 65 Cms.
4/11/J/-/01
20 SB20 ACB-CMXLSB20-000 4/12/J/-/01 3/08/J/-/02 70 Cms.
4/15/J/-/01
21 SB21 ACB-CMXLSB21-000 4/16/J/-/01 3/09/J/-/02 75 Cms.
4/17/J/-/01
22 SB22 ACB-CMXLSB22-000 4/18/J/-/01 3/10/J/-/02 80 Cms.
4/19/J/-/01

INSTALLATION MANUAL 269


Chapter 10.

SL. No. CABLE NO. ASSEMBLED CABLE SOURCE DESTINATION LENGTH REMARKS
FAN PART NUMBER PLACEMENT PLACEMENT
FRAME/SLOT/ FRAME/SLOT/
CONNECTOR/ CONNECTOR/
POSITION/NUMBER POSITION/NUMBER

23 SB23 ACB-CMXLSB23-000 4/20/J/-/01 3/11/J/-/02 85 Cms.


4/21/J/-/01

24 SB24 ACB-CMXLSB24-000 4/22/J/-/01 3/12/J/-/02 90 Cms.


4/05/J/-/02

25 SB25 ACB-CMXLSB25-000 4/06/J/-/02 3/15/J/-/02 95 Cms.


4/07/J/-/02

26 SB26 ACB-CMXLSB26-000 4/08/J/-/02 3/16/J/-/02 90 Cms.


4/09/J/-/02

27 SB27 ACB-CMXLSB27-000 4/10/J/-/02 3/17/J/-/02 85 Cms.


4/11/J/-/02
28 SB28 ACB-CMXLSB28-000 4/12/J/-/02 3/18/J/-/02 80 Cms.
4/15/J/-/02
29 SB29 ACB-CMXLSB29-000 4/16/J/-/02 3/19/J/-/02 75 Cms.
4/17/J/-/02
30 SB30 ACB-CMXLSB30-000 4/18/J/-/02 3/20/J/-/02 70 Cms.
4/19/J/-/02
31 SB31 ACB-CMXLSB31-000 4/19/J/-/02 3/21/J/-/02 70 Cms.
4/20/J/-/02

32 SB32 ACB-CMXLSB32-000 4/21/J/-/02 3/22/J/-/02 55 Cms.


4/22/J/-/02

Note :
See Figs. 10.61 (a) & 10.61 (b) for Cable routing.

270 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 271


Chapter 10.

272 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

TABLE 10.42
SYNC RELAY CABLE
SL. No. CABLE NO. CABLE PART SOURCE DESTINATION LENGTH REMARKS
NUMBER PLACEMENT PLACEMENT
FRAME/ FRAME/
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
1 SR01 ACB-CMXLSR01-000 2/J4 1/J16 60 Cms.

2 SR02 ACB-CMXLSR02-000 2/J5 1/J22 60 Cms.

3 SR03 ACB-CMXLSR03-000 2/J26 1/J18 60 Cms.

4 SR04 ACB-CMXLSR04-000 2/J27 1/J20 60 Cms.

5 SR05 ACB-CMXLSR05-000 3/J4 4/J16 60 Cms.

6 SR06 ACB-CMXLSR06-000 3/J5 4/J22 60 Cms.

7 SR07 ACB-CMXLSR07-000 3/J26 4/J18 60 Cms.

8 SR08 ACB-CMXLSR08-000 3/J27 4/J20 60 Cms.

Note : See Fig. 10.62 for cable routing.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 273


Chapter 10.

274 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

TABLE 10-43
SYSTEM SYNC CABLE ROUTING
SL. No. CABLE NO. ASSEMBLED CABLE SOURCE DESTINATION LENGTH REMARKS
FAN PART NUMBER PLACEMENT PLACEMENT
FRAME/SLOT/ FRAME/SLOT/
CONNECTOR/ CONNECTOR/
POSITION/NUMBER POSITION/NUMBER
1 SS01 ACB-CMXLSS01-000 5/J16 2/04/A/J/05 280 Cms.

2 SS02 ACB-CMXLSS02-000 5/J8 2/04/A/J/06 280 Cms.

3 SS03 ACB-CMXLSS03-000 5/J17 3/04/A/J/05 280 Cms.

4 SS04 ACB-CMXLSS04-000 5/J9 3/04/A/J/06 280 Cms.

5 SS05 ACB-CMXLSS05-000 5/J60 2/24/A/J/05 320 Cms.

6 SS06 ACB-CMXLSS06-000 5/J68 2/24/A/J/06 320 Cms.

7 SS07 ACB-CMXLSS07-000 5/J61 3/24/A/J/05 320 Cms.

8 SS08 ACB-CMXLSS08-000 5/J69 3/24/A/J/06 320 Cms.

Note : Refer Fig. 10.50 for cable routing.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 275


Chapter 10.

10.7. MDF CABLES

10.7.1. Detail of Digital Cable


CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXXDTXX-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG 10.63

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCTPS08-401


MCA-PVCSC512-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : DTXX/NN

CABLE DESCRIPTION : Shielded twisted pair digital cable, 8 pairs


32/0.2mm Green colour PVC wire

CABLE LENGTH : Site dependent

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : 1. Wire wrap contact block - 4 Nos.


MCC-BPWCB207-401
2. Polarised Hood 14 contact module
MCC-BPPOH207-401 - 4 Nos.
3. Ring Terminal 2.5 mm2 /M6
MCT-ERRIN015-401
4. 32/0.2mm PVC wire, green
(MCA-PVCSC512-401) 200mm

DESTINATION TERMINATION PART : Stripped wire


NO.

SOURCE PLACEMENT : Frame - Digital TU


Slot -2
Connector -A

TAB NO. RETAINED TAB NO - 1 For Module 1


2 For Module 2
3 For Module 3
4 For Module 4

DESTINATION PLACEMENT TAB NO. : MDF


RETAINED

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : --

Note :
1. NN denotes the BM number, it takes value from 1 to 32.
2. XX takes value from 1 to 4.

276 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 277


Chapter 10.

10.7.2. Detail of EMF Trunk Cable in TU1


CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXXAEXX-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG 10.64 (a) & 10.65 (a),

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-ICSBZ009-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : AEXX/NN

CABLE DESCRIPTION : 24 Pair cable arranged in 3 units of 8 pair each,


cable unit having a distinct coloured sleeve
(1 pair is spare).

CABLE LENGTH : Site dependent.

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCC-BPCSZ006-301


(32X2 IDC contact block assy)
MCC-BPCSZ005-301 (Piercing block)
MCC-BPCSZ007-301 (Universal cover)
MCS-PHSTT002-401 (Screw tapping 2x9.5)

DESTINATION TERMINATION PART : MDF


NO.

SOURCE PLACEMENT : BM (TU01)

TAB NO. RETAINED : 1 to 4

DESTINATION PLACEMENT : MDF Termination block

TAB NO. RETAINED : -

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Tool Type Dupont RC-216


Refer FIG 10.64 (a) & FIG. 10.65 (a)

Note :
1. XX can takes values from 1 to 16.
2. Fig. 10.64 (a) & 10.65 (a) are for EMF cables in TU1.
3. NN denotes the BM number, it takes value from 1 to 32.

278 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 279


Chapter 10.

280 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

10.7.3. Detail of EMF Trunk Cable in TU2, TU3 & TU4


CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXXACXX-000

DRAWING NO. : 10.64 (b) & 10.65 (b)

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-ICSBZ009-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : ACXX/NN

CABLE DESCRIPTION : 24 Pair cable arranged in 3 units of 8 pair each,


cable unit having a distinct coloured sleeve
(1 pair is spare).

CABLE LENGTH : Site dependent

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCC-BPCSZ006-301


(32x2 IDC Contact Block Assy)
MCC-BPCSZ005-301 (Piercing Block)
MCC-BPCSZ007-301 (Universal cover)
MCS-PHSTT002-401 (Screen tapping 2 x 9.5)

DESTINATION TERMINATION PART : NA (done on site) NIL


NO.

SOURCE PLACEMENT TAB NO. : BM (TU2/TU3/TU4)


RETAINED

DESTINATION PLACEMENT : MDF termination block


TAB NO. RETAINED

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Tool Type - Dupont RC-216


Refer FIG. 10.64 (b) & FIG. 10.65 (b)

Note :
1. XX can take value from 1 to 48.
2. NN denotes the BM number.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 281


Chapter 10.

282 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 283


Chapter 10.

10.7.4. Detail of TWT Trunk Cable in Terminal Unit 1


CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXXATXX-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG 10.66 (a) & FIG. 10.66 (b)

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-ICSBZ009-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : ATXX/NN

CABLE DESCRIPTION : 24 Pair (+1 Spare pair) Cable arranged in 3


units of 8 pair each, each cable unit having a
distinct coloured sleeve

CABLE LENGTH : Site dependent

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCC-BPCSZ011-401 2x7 Contact


Block Assy
MCC-BPCSZ012-401 2x7 Piercing Block
MCC-BPCSZ013-401 Cover 2 module

DESTINATION TERMINATION PART : NA (done on site)


NO.

CABLE UNIT COLOUR CODE : White**

CABLE UNIT DESCRIPTION : 8 pair, single round cable unit

SOURCE PLACEMENT : BM TU1


TAB NO. RETAINED Module 1:2
Module 2:1

DESTINATION PLACEMENT : NA (done on site)


TAB NO. RETAINED

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Tool Type - Dupont RC-216


Refer FIG. 10.66 (a) & 10.66 (b)

Note :
XX can take value 01 to 8.
** The other cable unit Colour is yellow. One 24 pair cable can have two
cable units of colour white and yellow. NN denotes the BM number, it
takes value from 1 to 32.

284 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 285


Chapter 10.

286 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

10.7.5. Detail of Subscriber & TWT Trunk Cable for TU2/3/4*


CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-MAXXAXXX-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.67 (a) & 10.67 (b)

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-ICSBZ011-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : AXXX/NN

CABLE DESCRIPTION : 64 Pair (+2 spare pair), cable arranged in a 8


units of 8 pair each, each cable unit having a
distinct coloured sleeve.

CABLE LENGTH : Site dependent (site dependent)

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCC-BPCSZ011-401


MCC-BPCSZ012-401
MCC-BPCSZ013-401

DESTINATION TERMINATION PART : NA (done at site)


NO.

SOURCE : As per Table 10.44

PLACEMENT : Module 1 : 1
TAB NO. RETAINED Module 2 : 2

DESTINATION : As per Table 10.44

PLACEMENT TAB NO. RETAINED :

CONNECTIVITY CONDUCTOR : -
ALIGNMENT

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Tool Type Dupont RC-216


Refer Fig. 10.67 (b)

Note :
1. X/P/Q/R/S/T : BM Number/Cabinet Number/Card Frame No./slot
No./Connector No./position on Connector.
2. In case of Line BM and LM, all TUs have 64 pair cables.
3. NN denotes the BM, it takes values from 1 to 32.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 287


Chapter 10.

288 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 289


Chapter 10.

10.7.6. Detail of ISDN Subscriber Cable for TU/1, TU2/3


CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-ISTUBNNN-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG. 10.67 (c) & 10.67 (d)

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-ICSBZ011-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : BXXX/NN

CABLE DESCRIPTION : 64 Pair (+2 spare pair), cable arranged in a 8


units of 8 pair each, each cable unit having a
distinct coloured sleeve.

CABLE LENGTH(site dependent) : Site dependent

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : MCC-BPCSZ011-401


MCC-BPCSZ012-401
MCC-BPCSZ013-401

DESTINATION TERMINATION PART : NA (done on site)


NO.

SOURCE : As per Table 10.44

PLACEMENT TAB NO. RETAINED : Module 1 : 1


Module 2 : 2

DESTINATION : As per Table 10.44

PLACEMENT :
TAB NO. RETAINED

CONNECTIVITY CONDUCTOR :-
ALIGNMENT

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : Tool Type Dupont RC-216


Refer Fig. 10.67 (b)

Note :
1. X/P/Q/R/S/T : BM Number/Cabinet Number/Card Frame No./slot
No./Connector No./position on Connector
2. NN denotes the BM, it takes values from 1 to 32.

290 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

\DESIGN\DSSMAX\MAX-XL\MAX-XLIM\MXI-TTCL

INSTALLATION MANUAL 291


Chapter 10.

292 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

10.7.7. Detail of Primary Rate Interface Cable


CDOT ASSY NO. : ACB-ISTUPRNN-000

DRAWING NO. : FIG 10.67 (e)

CABLE PART NO. : MCA-PVCTPS08-401


MCA-PVCSC512-401

CABLE MARKER NO. : PRXX/NN

CABLE DESCRIPTION : Shielded twisted pair digital cable, 8 pairs


32/0.2mm Green colour PVC wire

CABLE LENGTH : Site dependent

SOURCE TERMINATION PART NO. : 1. Wire wrap contact block - 4 Nos.


MCC-BPWCB207-401
2. Polarised Hood 14 contact module
MCC-BPPOH207-401 - 4 Nos.
3. Ring Terminal 2.5 mm 2 /M6
MCT-ERRIN015-401
4. 32/0.2mm PVC wire, green
(MCA-PVCSC512-401) 200mm

DESTINATION TERMINATION : Stripped wire


PART NO.

SOURCE PLACEMENT : ISDN TU (As per table 10.44)

TAB NO. RETAINED : All Modules

DESTINATION PLACEMENT : MDF


TAB NO. RETAINED

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE : --

Note :
1. NN denotes the BM number, it takes value from 1 to 32.
2. XX takes value from 1 to 16.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 293


Chapter 10.

294 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

TABLE 10.44
SL. No C-DOT ASSY NO CABLE No. CABLE UNIT CABLE UNIT SOURCE PLACEMENT
NO. COLOUR O/P/Q/R/S/T
1. ACB-MAXXA001-000 A001/NN AA03 White XX/1/1/3/A/1,2

AA04 Yellow XX/1/1/4/A/1,2

AA05 Brown XX/1/1/5/A/1,2

AA06 Blue XX/1/1/6/A/1,2

AA07 Grey XX/1/1/7/A/1,2


AA08 Black XX/1/1/8/A/1,2

AA09 Pink XX/1/1/9/A/1,2

AA10 Green XX/1/1/10/A/1,2


2. ACB-MAXXA002-000 A002/NN AA17 White XX/1/1/17/A/1,2

AA18 Yellow XX/1/1/18/A/1,2

AA19 Brown XX/1/1/19/A/1,2


AA20 Blue XX/1/1/20/A/1,2

AA21 Grey XX/1/1/21/A/1,2


AA22 Black XX/1/1/22/A/1,2

AA23 Pink XX/1/1/23/A/1,2

AA24 Green XX/1/1/24/A/1,2


3. ACB-MAXXA003-000 A003/NN AA03 White XX/1/2/3/A/1,2

AA04 Yellow XX/1/2/4/A/1,2

AA05 Brown XX/1/2/5/A/1,2

AA06 Blue XX/1/2/6/A/1,2

AA07 Grey XX/1/2/7/A/1,2


AA08 Black XX/1/2/8/A/1,2
AA09 Pink XX/1/2/9/A/1,2

AA10 Green XX/1/2/10/A/1,2


4. ACB-MAXXA004-000 A004/NN AA17 White XX/1/2/17/A/1,2

AA18 Yellow XX/1/2/18/A/1,2


AA19 Brown XX/1/2/19/A/1,2

AA20 Blue XX/1/2/20/A/1,2

AA21 Grey XX/1/2/21/A/1,2


AA22 Black XX/1/2/22/A/1,2

AA23 Pink XX/1/2/23/A/1,2

AA24 Green XX/1/2/24/A/1,2


5. ACB-MAXXA005-000 A005/NN AA03 White XX/1/3/3/A/1,2

AA04 Yellow XX/1/3/4/A/1,2

AA05 Brown XX/1/3/5/A/1,2


AA06 Blue XX/1/3/6/A/1,2

AA07 Grey XX/1/3/7/A/1,2

INSTALLATION MANUAL 295


Chapter 10.

SL. No C-DOT ASSY NO CABLE No. CABLE UNIT CABLE UNIT SOURCE PLACEMENT
NO. COLOUR O/P/Q/R/S/T

AA08 Black XX/1/3/8/A/1,2

AA09 Pink XX/1/3/9/A/1,2

AA10 Green XX/1/3/10/A/1,2


6. ACB-MAXXA006-000 A006/NN AA17 White XX/1/3/17/A/1,2
AA18 Yellow XX/1/3/18/A/1,2

AA19 Brown XX/1/3/19/A/1,2

AA20 Blue XX/1/3/20/A/1,2

AA21 Grey XX/1/3/21/A/1,2

AA22 Black XX/1/3/22/A/1,2

AA23 Pink XX/1/3/23/A/1,2

AA24 Green XX/1/3/24/A/1,2

7. ACB-MAXXA007-000 A007/NN AA03 White XX/1/4/3/A/1,2


AA04 Yellow XX/1/4/4/A/1,2
AA05 Brown XX/1/4/5/A/1,2

AA06 Blue XX/1/4/6/A/1,2


AA07 Grey XX/1/4/7/A/1,2
AA08 Black XX/1/4/8/A/1,2
AA09 Pink XX/1/4/9/A/1,2

AA10 Green XX/1/4/10/A/1,2


8. ACB-MAXXA008-000 A008/NN AA17 White XX/1/4/17/A/1,2
AA18 Yellow XX/1/4/18/A/1,2

AA19 Brown XX/1/4/19/A/1,2

AA20 Blue XX/1/4/20/A/1,2


AA21 Grey XX/1/4/21/A/1,2

AA22 Black XX/1/4/22/A/1,2


AA23 Pink XX/1/4/23/A/1,2

9. ACB-MAXXA009-000 A009/NN AA03 White XX/2/1/3/A/1,2

AA04 Yellow XX/2/1/4/A/1,2

AA05 Brown XX/2/1/5/A/1,2


AA06 Blue XX/2/1/6/A/1,2

AA07 Grey XX/2/1/7/A/1,2


AA08 Black XX/2/1/8/A/1,2

AA09 Pink XX/2/1/9/A/1,2

AA10 Green XX/2/1/10/A/1,2

10. ACB-MAXXA010-000 A010/NN AA17 White XX/2/1/17/A/1,2

AA18 Yellow XX/2/1/18/A/1,2

AA19 Brown XX/2/1/19/A/1,2

AA20 Blue XX/2/1/20/A/1,2

AA21 Grey XX/2/1/21/A/1,2

296 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

SL. No C-DOT ASSY NO CABLE No. CABLE UNIT CABLE UNIT SOURCE PLACEMENT
NO. COLOUR O/P/Q/R/S/T

AA22 Black XX/2/1/22/A/1,2

AA23 Pink XX/2/1/23/A/1,2

AA24 Green XX/2/1/24/A/1,2


11. ACB-MAXXA011-000 A011/NN AA03 White XX/2/2/3/A/1,2
AA04 Yellow XX/2/2/4/A/1,2

AA05 Brown XX/2/2/5/A/1,2

AA06 Blue XX/2/2/6/A/1,2

AA07 Grey XX/2/2/7/A/1,2

AA08 Black XX/2/2/8/A/1,2

AA09 Pink XX/2/2/9/A/1,2

AA10 Green XX/2/2/10/A/1,2

12. ACB-MAXXA012-000 A012/NN AA17 White XX/2/2/17/A/1,2


AA18 Yellow XX/2/2/18/A/1,2
AA19 Brown XX/2/2/19/A/1,2

AA20 Blue XX/2/2/20/A/1,2


AA21 Grey XX/2/2/21/A/1,2
AA22 Black XX/2/2/22/A/1,2
AA23 Pink XX/2/2/23/A/1,2

AA24 Green XX/2/2/24/A/1,2


13. ACB-MAXXA013-000 A013/NN AA03 White XX/2/3/3/A/1,2
AA04 Yellow XX/2/3/4/A/1,2

AA05 Brown XX/2/3/5/A/1,2

AA06 Blue XX/2/3/6/A/1,2


AA07 Grey XX/2/3/7/A/1,2

AA08 Black XX/2/3/8/A/1,2


AA09 Pink XX/2/3/9/A/1,2

AA10 Green XX/2/3/10/A/1,2

14. ACB-MAXXA014-000 A014/NN AA17 White XX/2/3/17/A/1,2

AA18 Yellow XX/2/3/18/A/1,2


AA19 Brown XX/2/3/19/A/1,2

AA20 Blue XX/2/3/20/A/1,2


AA21 Grey XX/2/3/21/A/1,2

AA22 Black XX/2/3/22/A/1,2

AA23 Pink XX/2/3/23/A/1,2

AA24 Green XX/2/3/24/A/1,2

15. ACB-MAXXA015-000 A015/NN AA03 White XX/2/4/3/A/1,2

AA04 Yellow XX/2/4/4/A/1,2

AA05 Brown XX/2/4/5/A/1,2

AA06 Blue XX/2/4/6/A/1,2

INSTALLATION MANUAL 297


Chapter 10.

SL. No C-DOT ASSY NO CABLE No. CABLE UNIT CABLE UNIT SOURCE PLACEMENT
NO. COLOUR O/P/Q/R/S/T

AA07 Grey XX/2/4/7/A/1,2

AA08 Black XX/2/4/8/A/1,2

AA09 Pink XX/2/4/9/A/1,2


AA10 Green XX/2/4/10/A/1,2
16. ACB-MAXXA016-000 A016/NN AA17 White XX/2/4/17/A/1,2

AA18 Yellow XX/2/4/18/A/1,2

AA19 Brown XX/2/4/19/A/1,2

AA20 Blue XX/2/4/20/A/1,2

AA21 Grey XX/2/4/21/A/1,2

AA22 Black XX/2/4/22/A/1,2

AA23 Pink XX/2/4/23/A/1,2

AA24 Green XX/2/4/24/A/1,2


17. ACB-MAXXA017-000 A017/NN AA03 White XX/2/5/3/A/1,2
AA04 Yellow XX/2/5/4/A/1,2

AA05 Brown XX/2/5/5/A/1,2


AA06 Blue XX/2/5/6/A/1,2
AA07 Grey XX/2/5/7/A/1,2
AA08 Black XX/2/5/8/A/1,2

AA09 Pink XX/2/5/9/A/1,2


AA10 Green XX/2/5/10/A/1,2
18. ACB-MAXXA018-000 A018/NN AA17 White XX/2/5/17/A/1,2

AA18 Yellow XX/2/5/18/A/1,2

AA19 Brown XX/2/5/19/A/1,2


AA20 Blue XX/2/5/20/A/1,2

AA21 Grey XX/2/5/21/A/1,2


AA22 Black XX/2/5/22/A/1,2

AA23 Pink XX/2/5/23/A/1,2

AA24 Green XX/2/5/24/A/1,2

19. ACB-MAXXA019-000 A019/NN AA03 White XX/2/6/3/A/1,2


AA04 Yellow XX/2/6/4/A/1,2

AA05 Brown XX/2/6/5/A/1,2


AA06 Blue XX/2/6/6/A/1,2

AA07 Grey XX/2/6/7/A/1,2

AA08 Black XX/2/6/8/A/1,2

AA09 Pink XX/2/6/9/A/1,2

AA10 Green XX/2/6/10/A/1,2

20. ACB-MAXXA020-000 A020/NN AA17 White XX/2/6/17/A/1,2

AA18 Yellow XX/2/6/18/A/1,2

AA19 Brown XX/2/6/19/A/1,2

298 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

SL. No C-DOT ASSY NO CABLE No. CABLE UNIT CABLE UNIT SOURCE PLACEMENT
NO. COLOUR O/P/Q/R/S/T

AA20 Blue XX/2/6/20/A/1,2

AA21 Grey XX/2/6/21/A/1,2

AA22 Black XX/2/6/22/A/1,2


AA23 Pink XX/2/6/23/A/1,2
AA24 Green XX/2/6/24/A/1,2

21. ACB-MAXXA021-000 A021/NN AA03 White XX/3/1/3/A/1,2

AA04 Yellow XX/3/1/4/A/1,2

AA05 Brown XX/3/1/5/A/1,2

AA06 Blue XX/3/1/6/A/1,2

AA07 Grey XX/3/1/7/A/1,2

AA08 Black XX/3/1/8/A/1,2

AA09 Pink XX/3/1/9/A/1,2


AA10 Green XX/3/1/10/A/1,2
22. ACB-MAXXA022-000 A022/NN AA17 White XX/3/1/17/A/1,2

AA18 Yellow XX/3/1/18/A/1,2


AA19 Brown XX/3/1/19/A/1,2
AA20 Blue XX/3/1/20/A/1,2
AA21 Grey XX/3/1/21/A/1,2

AA22 Black XX/3/1/22/A/1,2


AA23 Pink XX/3/1/23/A/1,2
AA24 Green XX/3/1/24/A/1,2

23. ACB-MAXXA023-000 A023/NN AA03 White XX/3/2/3/A/1,2

AA04 Yellow XX/3/2/4/A/1,2


AA05 Brown XX/3/2/5/A/1,2

AA06 Blue XX/3/2/6/A/1,2


AA07 Grey XX/3/2/7/A/1,2

AA08 Black XX/3/2/8/A/1,2

AA09 Pink XX/3/2/9/A/1,2

AA10 Green XX/3/2/10/A/1,2


24. ACB-MAXXA024-000 A024/NN AA17 White XX/3/2/17/A/1,2

AA18 Yellow XX/3/2/18/A/1,2


AA19 Brown XX/3/2/19/A/1,2

AA20 Blue XX/3/2/20/A/1,2

AA21 Grey XX/3/2/21/A/1,2

AA22 Black XX/3/2/22/A/1,2

AA23 Pink XX/3/2/23/A/1,2

AA24 Green XX/3/2/24/A/1,2

25. ACB-MAXXA025-000 A025/NN AA03 White XX/3/3/3/A/1,2

AA04 Yellow XX/3/3/4/A/1,2

INSTALLATION MANUAL 299


Chapter 10.

SL. No C-DOT ASSY NO CABLE No. CABLE UNIT CABLE UNIT SOURCE PLACEMENT
NO. COLOUR O/P/Q/R/S/T

AA05 Brown XX/3/3/5/A/1,2

AA06 Blue XX/3/3/6/A/1,2

AA07 Grey XX/3/3/7/A/1,2


AA08 Black XX/3/3/8/A/1,2
AA09 Pink XX/3/3/9/A/1,2

AA10 Green XX/3/3/10/A/1,2

26. ACB-MAXXA026-000 A026/NN AA17 White


XX/3/3/17/A/1,2

AA18 Yellow XX/3/3/18/A/1,2

AA19 Brown XX/3/3/19/A/1,2

AA20 Blue XX/3/3/20/A/1,2

AA21 Grey XX/3/3/21/A/1,2

AA22 Black XX/3/3/22/A/1,2

AA23 Pink XX/3/3/23/A/1,2


AA24 Green XX/3/3/24/A/1,2

27. ACB-MAXXA027-000 A027/NN AA03 White XX/3/4/3/A/1,2

AA04 Yellow XX/3/4/4/A/1,2


AA05 Brown XX/3/4/5/A/1,2

AA06 Blue XX/3/4/6/A/1,2


AA07 Grey XX/3/4/7/A/1,2

AA08 Black XX/3/4/8/A/1,2

AA09 Pink XX/3/4/9/A/1,2


AA10 Green XX/3/4/10/A/1,2

28. ACB-MAXXA028-000 A028/NN AA17 White XX/3/4/17/A/1,2


AA18 Yellow XX/3/4/18/A/1,2

AA19 Brown XX/3/4/19/A/1,2

AA20 Blue XX/3/4/20/A/1,2


AA21 Grey XX/3/4/21/A/1,2

AA22 Black XX/3/4/22/A/1,2


AA23 Pink XX/3/4/23/A/1,2

AA24 Green XX/3/4/24/A/1,2

29. ACB-MAXXA029-000 A029/NN AA03 White XX/3/5/3/A/1,2

AA04 Yellow XX/3/5/4/A/1,2

AA05 Brown XX/3/5/5/A/1,2

AA06 Blue XX/3/5/6/A/1,2


AA07 Grey XX/3/5/7/A/1,2

AA08 Black XX/3/5/8/A/1,2

AA09 Pink XX/3/5/9/A/1,2

AA10 Green XX/3/5/10/A/1,2

300 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

SL. No C-DOT ASSY NO CABLE No. CABLE UNIT CABLE UNIT SOURCE PLACEMENT
NO. COLOUR O/P/Q/R/S/T

30. ACB-MAXXA030-000 A030/NN AA17 White XX/3/5/17/A/1,2

AA18 Yellow XX/3/5/18/A/1,2

AA19 Brown XX/3/5/19/A/1,2


AA20 Blue XX/3/5/20/A/1,2
AA21 Grey XX/3/5/21/A/1,2

AA22 Black XX/3/5/22/A/1,2

AA23 Pink XX/3/5/23/A/1,2

AA24 Green XX/3/5/24/A/1,2

31. ACB-MAXXA031-000 A031/NN AA03 White XX/3/6/3/A/1,2

AA04 Yellow XX/3/6/4/A/1,2

AA05 Brown XX/3/6/5/A/1,2

AA06 Blue XX/3/6/6/A/1,2


AA07 Grey XX/3/6/7/A/1,2
AA08 Black XX/3/6/8/A/1,2

AA09 Pink XX/3/6/9/A/1,2


AA10 Green XX/3/6/10/A/1,2
32. ACB-MAXXA032-000 A032/NN AA17 White XX/3/6/17/A/1,2
AA18 Yellow XX/3/6/18/A/1,2

AA19 Brown XX/3/6/19/A/1,2


AA20 Blue XX/3/6/20/A/1,2
AA21 Grey XX/3/6/21/A/1,2

AA22 Black XX/3/6/22/A/1,2

AA23 Pink XX/3/6/23/A/1,2


AA24 Green XX/3/6/24/A/1,2

33. ACB-ISTUB001-000 B001/NN BB05 White XX/1/1/5/A/1,2


BB06 Yellow XX/1/1/6/A/1,2

BB07 Brown XX/1/1/7/A/1,2

BB08 Blue XX/1/1/8/A/1,2

BB09 Grey XX/1/1/9/A/1,2


BB10 Black XX/1/1/10/A/1,2

BB11 Pink XX/1/1/11/A/1,2


BB12 Green XX/1/1/12/A/1,2

34. ACB-ISTUB002-000 B002/NN BB05 White XX/1/1/19/A/1,2

BB06 Yellow XX/1/1/20/A/1,2

BB07 Brown XX/1/1/21/A/1,2

BB08 Blue XX/1/1/22/A/1,2

BB09 Grey XX/1/1/23/A/1,2

BB10 Black XX/1/1/24/A/1,2

BB11 Pink XX/1/1/25/A/1,2

INSTALLATION MANUAL 301


Chapter 10.

SL. No C-DOT ASSY NO CABLE No. CABLE UNIT CABLE UNIT SOURCE PLACEMENT
NO. COLOUR O/P/Q/R/S/T

BB12 Green XX/1/1/26/A/1,2

35. ACB-ISTUB003-000 B003/NN BB05 White XX/1/2/5/A/1,2

BB06 Yellow XX/1/2/6/A/1,2


BB07 Brown XX/1/2/7/A/1,2
BB08 Blue XX/1/2/8/A/1,2

BB09 Grey XX/1/2/9/A/1,2

BB10 Black XX/1/2/10/A/1,2

BB11 Pink XX/1/2/11/A/1,2

BB12 Green XX/1/2/12/A/1,2

36. ACB-ISTUB004-000 B004/NN BB19 White XX/1/2/19/A/1,2

BB20 Yellow XX/1/2/20/A/1,2

BB21 Brown XX/1/2/21/A/1,2


BB22 Blue XX/1/2/22/A/1,2
BB23 Grey XX/1/2/23/A/1,2

BB24 Black XX/1/2/24/A/1,2


BB25 Pink XX/1/2/25/A/1,2
BB26 Green XX/1/2/26/A/1,2
37. ACB-ISTUB005-000 B005/NN BB05 White XX/1/3/5/A/1,2

BB06 Yellow XX/1/3/6/A/1,2


BB07 Brown XX/1/3/7/A/1,2
BB08 Blue XX/1/3/8/A/1,2

BB09 Grey XX/1/3/9/A/1,2

BB10 Black XX/1/3/10/A/1,2


BB11 Pink XX/1/3/11/A/1,2

BB12 Green XX/1/3/12/A/1,2


38. ACB-ISTUB006-000 B006/NN BB19 White XX/1/3/19/A/1,2

BB20 Yellow XX/1/3/20/A/1,2

BB21 Brown XX/1/3/21/A/1,2

BB22 Blue XX/1/3/22/A/1,2


BB23 Grey XX/1/3/23/A/1,2

BB24 Black XX/1/3/24/A/1,2


BB25 Pink XX/1/3/25/A/1,2

BB26 Green XX/1/3/26/A/1,2

39. ACB-ISTUPR01-000 PR01/NN PI05 XX/1/1/5/A/1

PI07 XX/1/1/7/A/1

PI09 XX/1/1/9/A/1

PI11 XX/1/1/11/A/1

40. ACB-ISTUPR03-000 PR03/NN PI19 XX/1/1/19/A/1

PI21 XX/1/1/21/A/1

302 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

SL. No C-DOT ASSY NO CABLE No. CABLE UNIT CABLE UNIT SOURCE PLACEMENT
NO. COLOUR O/P/Q/R/S/T

PI23 XX/1/1/23/A/1

PI25 XX/1/1/25/A/1

41. ACB-ISTUPR05-000 PR05/NN PI05 XX/1/2/5/A/1


PI07 XX/1/2/7/A/1
PI09 XX/1/2/9/A/1

PI11 XX/1/2/11/A/1

42. ACB-ISTUPR07-000 PR07/NN PI19 XX/1/2/19/A/1

PI21 XX/1/2/21/A/1

PI23 XX/1/2/23/A/1

PI25 XX/1/2/25/A/1

43. ACB-ISTUPR09-000 PR09/NN PI05 XX/1/3/5/A/1

PI07 XX/1/3/7/A/1
PI09 XX/1/3/9/A/1
PI11 XX/1/3/11/A/1

44. ACB-ISTUPR11-000 PR11/NN PI19 XX/1/3/19/A/1


PI21 XX/1/3/21/A/1
PI23 XX/1/3/23/A/1
PI25 XX/1/3/25/A/1

Note :
XX & NN denotes the BM numbers, it takes value from 1 to 32.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 303


Chapter 10.

10.8. MAX MDF WIRING (GENERAL)


The framework of MDF consists of two sides. Front side is called EXCHANGE SIDE
& backside is called LINE SIDE. Backmount frame on EXCHANGE SIDE is of 8x8
pair type i.e. 64 pairs while on LINE SIDE it is of 10x10 pair type i.e. 100 pairs.
Both vertical on EXCHANGE SIDE and LINE SIDE has 10 backmount frames.
Backmount frame on EXCHANGE SIDE is mounted horizontally while on LINE
SIDE it is mounted vertically. Refer Fig. 10.52 for these details. Each vertical is
represented by V1, V2, V3 .... First backmount frame on first vertical in exchange
side is represented as V1/1 and the last backmount frame on first vertical as V1/10.
This is shown in Fig. 10.52. Each backmount on exchange side has provision to
mount 8 disconnection modules and one module label holder. The module label
holder is mounted on the left hand side as viewed from front of exchange side.
Similarly on the Line side module label holder is mounted on the bottom side. 8
cable units (8 pairs each) of 64 pair cable are terminated on 8 disconnection
modules from left to right as viewed from front on exchange side. Eight pairs of one
cable unit are terminated from bottom to top. The termination detail of one 64 pair
cable is shown in Fig. 10.49.
EXCHANGE SIDE DETAILS
There can be different configurations like
a) BM (lines only)
b) LM (lines only)
c) BM (digital trunks only)
d) BM (analog trunks & digital trunks)
Cable details for these configurations are as below;
Exchange Side Cables

BM (lines only ) Only 64 pairs cable


LM (lines only) - do -
BM (digital trunks only) 8 pair, single strand shielded cable
BM (analog trunks 24 pair cable for TU-1 8 Pair, single strand
digital trunks) shielded cable for TU-2 (assuming TU-2 to be
digital TU)
64 pair cable for TU3, TU4
BM (Analog + Digital Trunks)
Any combination of Analog & Digital TUs is possible. Digital TU supports only
Digital trunks and Analog TU supports both E&M and TWT trunks.

304 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

Although technically there is no limitation but as a matter of symmetry E&M


Trunks will be accommodated in TU1. One 24 pair cable will be required for each
E&M card. The entry of these cables are through the holes provided at the top of
TU1.
For each DTU, one 8 pair digital trunk cable will be sufficient. For TWT trunks 64
pair cables are used in other than TU1.
BM (Digital trunks only)
In this case only one cable of 8 pairs will be laid for 4 Digital Trunks in each TU.
Wiring Details for Lines & Trunk BM on MDF
MDF for Multimodule exchange is supplied in multiple of 5 verticals. For exchanges
upto 2K lines 5 vertical MDF is enough. For higher capacity exchanges 10 to 20
vertical MDFs are supplied. In a 5 vertical MDF, first 4 verticals can be used for
terminating 2 Line BMs and 2 LMs. The 5th vertical can be used for Trunk BM.
Each vertical of the MDF has 10 backmount frames. As shown in fig. 10.52, vertical
V1, backmount frame V1/1 and V1/2 accommodates TU-1 of BM1. Similarly TU-2,
TU-3 and TU-4 are terminated upto V1/8. Then TU-1 of LM-1 of BM-1 is terminated
on V1/9 & V1/10. Rest of the TUs of LM-1 and LM2 are terminated on vertical V2,
V3, V4/1, V4/2 of vertical V4. Now the last vertical V5 can accommodate Trunk BM
(say BM5) if only 5 verticals are available. Fig. 10.52 explains the case of 7.5K line
exchange termination on 15 verticals. E&M Trunks of TU-1 in BM5 will be
terminated on V13/1 to V13/7. Each backmount frame can accommodate 2 EMF
cards. Detail of termination is given in Fig. 10.51 (b). A maximum of 14 EMF cards
can be there in TU-1 which will absorb 7 backmount frames of V13. Backmount
frame V13/8 & V13/9 can be allotted to TU-3. TU-3 has only TWT trunks. TWT
trunks of TU4 can be terminated on V13/10 for slots 3 to 10. For this purpose 64
pair cable can be used as in the case of TU- 3 whereas for slots 17 to 24, 24 pair
cable can be used. So fair 24 pair cables will be used for slots 17 to 24. These cables
can be terminated on the 2 LSA plus modules free on each backmount of TU-1 i.e.
V13/1 to V13/7. This is shown in Fig. 10.51 (b). So in this fashion one vertical can
accommodate one Trunk BM. Similarly V14 and V15 can be used for other Trunk
BMs.
Lineside Details
100 Pair switchboard cable can be used for termination on the line side backmount
frames, either from bottom to top or top to bottom. The underground cable can also
be terminated directly on the backmount frames. But care should be taken that the
underground cables is routed along the vertical from bottom to top. It should not be
laid from top to bottom, otherwise jelly will keep on dropping from cable. The 100
pair cable termination on a backmount frame of 10x10 is explained in Fig. 10.50.
The cable is to be terminated on the top side of the disconnection modules and
bottom side is to be used for jumpering. The first pair is to be terminated on the left
hand side of the bottom disconnection module. Terminations should grow from left

INSTALLATION MANUAL 305


Chapter 10.

to right for each disconnection module and disconnection modules should grow from
bottom to top. One vertical will be able to accommodate 1000 pairs.

10.9. CABLE LIST


SL. CABLE MARKER C-DOT ASSY NO FROM TO Cable Size REMARKS
No. NO.
1. AXXX (XXX = ACB-MAXXAXXX-000 BM/LM MDF 64 Pair Used for
001 to 032) (As per table subscriber
10.44) cabling
2. ACXX/NN (XX= ACB-MAXXACXX-000 BM (TU2/TU3/ MDF 24 Pair EMF trunk
1 to 48) TU4) TERMINATION cable TU2, TU3
BLOCK & in TU4
3. AEXX/NN (XX= ACB-MAXXAEXX-000 BM (TU01) MDF 24 Pair EMF trunk
1 to 16) TERMINATION cable in TU1
BLOCK
4. AT01 to AT08 ACB-MAXXATXX-000 BM (TU1) MDF 24 Pair Subscriber and
cable TWT trunk
cable in TU1.
5. BCNN (NN = ACB-MAXXBCNN-000 As per table RG-188 BM to CM clock
1 to 64) 10.24 coaxial cable
6. BDXX (XX = 1 to 64) ACB-MAXXBDXX-000 As per table 11X2 BM to CM data
10.23 unshielded cable
7. BPTX ACB-MAXXBPTX-000 BPU/SCU/HPU VDU
(See sec 10.6.4)
8. DFXX (XX =11 to ACB-MAXLDFXX-000 Suite MCB's FBI Card 1mm2
26)
9. DGUX (X 1 to 4) DCDP's FBI 2.5mm2
10. DPUX (X 1 to 4) DCDP's FBI 2.5mm2
11. DTXX (XX = 1 to 4) ACB-MAXXDTXX-000 Digital TU/ Slot MDF 8 pair
2 Connector A shielded
12. FFXX (XX =01 to 10 ACB-MAXLFFXX-000 As per Table 2.5 mm2 PVC insulated
10.11 Black.
13. FG01 ACB-MAXLFG01-000 Copy 1 -48V gnd Male power 2.5 mm2
busbar connector
Filterbox copy 1
TU1
14. FI01 ACB-MAXLFI01-000 Female power Male power mate - do-
mate connector connector filterbox
of filter box frame 6 copy 0
frame 6 copy 1
15. FPXX (XX =1 to 16) ACB-MAXLPPXX-000 As per table 1 mm2 -48V cable from
10.8 (a) PDP to FBI
16. FPXX (XX = 17 to ACB-MAXXFPXX-000 --do-- 2.5 mm2
20)
17. GA01 ACB-MAXLGA01-000 Earth collector Antistatic flooring 10 mm2
plate (black)
18. GCA1 ACB-MAXLGCA1-000 Earth collector Cable shield 25 sqmm Single core
plate. power cable
black.
19. GCC1 ACB-MAXLGCC1-000 DCDP1 Chassis DCDP1 Chassis 25 sqmm Single core
GND power cable
Black
20. GCC2 ACB-MAXLGCC2-000 DCDP2 Chassis DCDP2 GND 25mm2
GND Chassis

306 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

SL. CABLE MARKER C-DOT ASSY NO FROM TO Cable Size REMARKS


No. NO.
GND Chassis
21. GCD1 ACB-MAXLGCD1-000 Earth Collector DCDP1 Chassis 25 mm2
Plate GND (Block)
22. GCD2 ACB-MAXLGCD2-000 Earth Collector DCDP2 Chassis 25 mm2
Plate GND (Block)
23. GCI1 ACB-MAXLGCI1-000 Earth collector IDP chassis 25 mm2 Single core
plate power cable.
Black
24. GCC1 ACB-MAXLGCC1-000 DCDP1 Chassis DCDP2 chassis 25mm2 -do--
gnd
25. GCC2 ACB-MAXLGCC2-000 DCDP2 Chassis DCDP2 chassis 25mm2 --do--
gnd
26. GCIP ACB-MAXLGCIP-000 DCDP1 Chassis IOP-PDP Chassis 25mm2 --do--
gnd GND
27. GCP1 ACB-MAXLGCP1-000 DCDP1 Chassis PDP Chassis GND 25mm2 Single power
gnd (suite1) cable back.
28. GCP2 ACB-MAXLGCP2-000 - do- -do- (suite2 ) -do- -do-
29. GCP3 ACB-MAXLGCP3-000 - do- -do- (suite3 ) -do- -do-
30. GCP4 ACB-MAXLGCP4-000 DCDP2 Chassis -do- (suite4) -do- -do-
gnd
31. GCP5 ACB-MAXLGCP5-000 DCDP2 Chassis -do- (suite5) -do- -do-
gnd
32. GDIP ACB-MAXLGDIP-000 DCDP1 chassis IOP PDP digital -do- -do-
digital gnd GND
33. GDP1 ACB-MAXLGDP1-000 DCDP1 digital PDP digital gnd -do- -do-
gnd (suite1)
34. GDP2 ACB-MAXLGDP2-000 -do - -do-(suite 2) -do- -do-
35. GDP3 ACB-MAXLGDP3-000 -do - -do-(suite 3) -do- -do-
36. GDP4 ACB-MAXLGDP4-000 DCDP2 Digital -do- (suite 4) -do- -do-
gnd
37. GDP5 ACB-MAXLGDP5-000 -do - -do-(suite 5) -do- -do-
38. GDS1 ACB-MAXLGDS1-000 Earth collector DCDP1 digital 240 mm2 Single core
plate gnd power cable.
39. GDS2 ACB-MAXLGDS2-000 -do- DCDP2 Digital 240 mm2 -do-
gnd
40. GEM1 ACB-MACMGEM1-000 Earth pit Earth collector 240 mm2
plate
41. GI01 ACB-MAXLGI01-000 Inverter 1 OMA panel point 2.5 mm2 PVC insulated
(TB-8) cable. Red
42. GI02 ACB-MAXLGI02-000 Inverter 2 OMA panel 2.5mm2 -do-
43. GI03 ACB-MAXLGI03-000 Inverter 3 2.5mm2 -do-
44. GM01 ACB-MAXLGM01-000 Earth collector MDF Lines 2.5mm2 Single Core
plate Power Cable
Block
45. GM02 ACB-MAXLGM02-000 Earth collector MDF (Trunks ) 25 mm2 Single core
plate power cable.
Black
46. GMP1 ACB-MAXLGMP1-000 Earth collector MDF (PCM) -do-
plate

INSTALLATION MANUAL 307


Chapter 10.

SL. CABLE MARKER C-DOT ASSY NO FROM TO Cable Size REMARKS


No. NO.
47. GP01 ACB-MAXLGP01-000 Power plant fail OMA panel 2.5 mm2 PVC insulated
o/p cable. Red
48. GR01 ACB-MAXLGR01-000 Earth Collector Switching Cubicle 240 mm2
Plate -48 gnd
49. HA04 ACB-MAXXHA04-000 ADP HPU (Frame 6) 11 Pair
C0/J20/2 &
C1/J36/2
50. HDX0 ACB-IOPHHDX0-000 IOP-0 VHI HPU (Frame 6) -do-
HDLC2 C0/J20/3
51. HDX1 ACB-IOPHHDX1-000 IOP-0 VHI HPU (Frame 6) -do-
HDLC0 C1/J36/3
52. HDY0 ACB-IOPHHDY0-000 IOP-1 VHI HPU (Frame 6) -do-
HDLC2 C0/J20/4
53. HDY1 ACB-IOPHHDY1-000 IOP-1 VHI HPU (Frame 6) -do-
HDLC0 C1/J36/4
54. HDZ1 ACB-IOPHHDZ1-000 IOP-0 VHI IOP-1 VHI Panel -do-
Panel HDLC1 HDLC1
55. PDXX (XX=1 to 09) ACB-MAXLPDXX-000 As per table 10 mm2 Single core
10.9 power cable.
Black
56. PEXX (XX=1 to 08) ACB-MAXLPEXX-000 As per table 10 mm2 Single core
10.10 power cable.
Black
57. PGD1 ACB-MAXLPGD1-000 IDP -48V gnd DCDP1 -48V gnd 240 mm2 Single core
power cable.
Red
58. PGD2 ACB-MAXLPGD2-000 IDP -48V gnd DCDP2 -48V GND 240 mm2 Single core
power cable.
Red
59. PGF1 ACB-MAXLPGF1-000 DCDP1 FBI IOP-PDP FBI card 2.5 mm2 PVC insulted
Card J32 J42 cable. Red
60. PGF2 ACB-MAXLPGF2-000 DCDP2 FBI DCDP1 FBI card 2.5 mm2 PVC insulted
card J32 J42 cable. Red
61. PGF3 ACB-MAXLPGF3-000 Suite 1 FBI card DCDP2 FBI card 2.5 mm2 PVC insulted
J32 J42 cable. Red
62. PGF4 ACB-MAXLPGF4-000 Suite 2 FBI card Suite 8 FBI card 2.5 mm2 PVC insulted
J32 J42 cable. Red
63. PGF5 ACB-MAXLPGF5-000 Suite 3 FBI J32 Suite 2 FBI card 2.5 mm2 PVC insulted
J42 cable. Red
64. PGF6 ACB-MAXLPGF6-000 Suite 4 FBI J32 Suite 3 FBI card 2.5 mm2 PVC insulted
J42 cable. Red
65. PGF7 ACB-MAXLPGF7-000 Suite 5 FBI J32 Suite 4 FBI 2.5mm2 PVC insulated
J42 cable. Red
66. PGI1 ACB-MAXLPGI1-000 DCDP1 -48V Inverter-1 25 mm2 Red
GND (gnd cable)
67. PGI2 ACB-MAXLPGI2-000 DCDP1 -48V Inverter-2 (gnd -do-
GND cable)
68. PG13 ACB-MAXLPG13-000 DCDP2 -48V Inverter-3 -48V -do- -do-
gnd gnd
69. PPL1 ACB-MAXLPPL1-000 Suite FBI card Suite alarm gnd 2.5 mm2 PVC insulated
J31 cable. Red

308 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

SL. CABLE MARKER C-DOT ASSY NO FROM TO Cable Size REMARKS


No. NO.
70. PGL1 ACB-MAXLPGL1-000 DCDP1 FBI -do-
card J31
71. PGL2 ACB-MAXLPGL2-000 DCDP2 FBI -do-
J31
72. PGM1 ACB-MAXLPGM1-000 DCDP1 -48V IOP PDP -48V gnd 25 mm2 Single core
gnd power cable.
73. PGR1 ACB-MAXLPGR1-000 IOP PDP FBI OMA SWR point 2.5mm2
card J32
74. PGSI ACB-MAXLPGSI-000 Switching IDP -48V gnd 240 mm2 -do-
cubicle (Red)
75. PGU1 ACB-MAXLPGU1-000 -48V gnd FBI Card 2.5 mm2
(Copy 0) bus bar (suite) J37 (Red)
on PDP
76. PGU2 ACB-MAXLPGU2-000 -48V gnd FBI Card -do-
(copy 1) busbar (suite) J39
on PDP
77. PGV1 ACB-MAXLPGV1-000 IOP PDP -48V FBI card 2.5 mm2 PVC insulated
gnd J37 cable. Red
78. PGV2 ACB-MAXLPGV2-000 IOP PDP -48V FBI card 2.5 mm2 PVC insulated
gnd J39 cable. Red
79. PGXX (XX = ACB-MAXLPGXX-000 As per table 16 mm2 Single core
1 to 16) 10.7 (Red) power cable.
80. PLXX (XX = ACB-MAXLPLXX-000 As per Table 120 mm2 -do-
10.5 Blue)
81. PMG1 ACB-MAXLPMG1-000 IOP-PDP OMA -48V and 2.5 mm2
Pin of TB2
82. PMP1 ACB-MAXLPMP1-000 IOP-PDP OMA -48V Pin of 2.5 mm2
TB1 (Blue)
83. PNXX (XX = ACB-MAXLPNXX-000 As per Table 120 mm2 -do-
1 TO 10) 10.5 (Red)
84. PPA3 ACB-MAXLPPA3-000 IOP PDP ADP (Back cover) 32/0.2mm4 ADP Power
core (-48v) cable
85. PPC1 ACB-MAXLPPC1-000 -48V DCDP1 IOP-PDP 25 mm2
Misc. MCB -48V OMC (Blue)
86. PPD1 ACB-MAXLPPD1-000 IDP -48V DCDP1 240 mm2
busbar -48V busbar (Blue)
87. PPD2 ACB-MAXLPPD2-000 -do- DCDP2 240 mm2
-48V busbar
88. PPI1 ACB-MAXLPPI1-000 DCDP1 -48V Invertor –1 25 mm2
INV-1 -48V cable (Blue)
89. PPI2 ACB-MAXLPPI2-000 DCDP1 -48V Invertor -2 -do-
INV-2 -48V cable
90. PPI3 ACB-MAXLPPI3-000 DCDP2 -48V Invertor -3 25mm2
INV-3 -48V cable
91. PPL1 ACB-MAXLPPL1-000 Suite FBI card Suite alarm Red 2.5mm2
J33 lamp
92. PPL1 ACB-MAXLPPL1-000 DCDP1 FBI Suite alarm Red 2.5mm2
card J33 lamp
93. PPL2 ACB-MAXLPPL2-000 Suite FBI card Suite alarm White 2.5mm2
J35 lamp
94. PPL2 ACB-MAXLPPL2-000 DCDP1 FBI -do-
card J35

INSTALLATION MANUAL 309


Chapter 10.

SL. CABLE MARKER C-DOT ASSY NO FROM TO Cable Size REMARKS


No. NO.
card J35
95. PPL3 ACB-MAXLPPL3-000 DCDP2 FBI -do- 2.5mm2
card J33
96. PPL4 ACB-MAXLPPL4-000 DCDP2 FBI -do- 2.5mm2
card J35
97. PPM1 ACB-MAXLPPM1-000 DCDP1 -48V -48V busbar IOP- 25mm2 Single core
IOP-PDP MCB PDP (Blue) Power cable
98. PPSI ACB-MAXLPPSI-000 Switching IDP -48V 240 mm2 -do-
Cubicle (Blue)
99. PPQ1 ACB-MAXLPPQ1-000 IOP-PDP IOP0 4 Core Black
Multistrand
(80/.2) mm2
100. PPQ2 ACB-MAXLPPQ2-000 IOP-PDP IOP1 4 core (Black)
multistrand
(80/.2) mm2
101. PPU1 ACB-MAXLPPU1-000 -48V Fuse F19 FBI Card 2.5mm2
copy 0 of PDP J41 (Blue)
102. PPU2 ACB-MAXLPPU2-000 -48V Fuse F20 FBI Card -do-
copy 1 of PDP J43
103 PPV1 ACB-MAXLPPV1-000 -48V busbar FBI Card 2.5mm2 PVC insulated
IOP-PDP J41 (Blue) cable.
104. PPV2 ACB-MAXLPPV2-000 -do- FBI Card 2.5mm2 PVC Insulated
J43 (Blue) cable
105 PRI0 ACB-IOPHPRI0-000 IOP0 VHI Printer1 8 Pair Cable
ACIO-I
106. PRI1 ACB-IOPHPRI1-000 IOP1 VHI Printer2 -do-
ACIO-I
107. PPXX (XX = ACB-MAXLPPXX-000 As per Table 16mm2 -48V cables
01 TO 16) 10.8 (a) from PDP to
cabinets.
TA01 ACB-MAXLTA01-000 As per Table TA cable in BM
10.21
108. TAYY (YY = ACB-MAXLTAYY-000 As per Table 7/36, Test Access
02 to 05) 10.21 28AWG cables in LMs.
Grey
109. TEX1 ACB-IOPHTEX1-000 IOP0 VHI Console Terminal 8 pair Cable from IOP
(console) Teleph. to VDU
Terminals.
110. TEX2 ACB-IOPHTEX2-000 IOP0 VHI CRP Terminal 8 pair Cable from IOP
ASIO-2 Teleph to VDU
Terminals.
111. TEX3 ACB-IOPHTEX3-000 IOP0 VHI OOD Terminal 8 pair Cable from IOP
ASIO3 Teleph. to VDU
Terminals.
112. TEX4 ACB-IOPHTEX4-000 IOP0 VHI CRP Terminal 8 pair Cable from IOP
ASIO4 Teleph. to VDU
Terminals.

310 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


CABLE PREPARATION AND LAYING

SL. CABLE MARKER C-DOT ASSY NO FROM TO Cable Size REMARKS


No. NO.
113. TEX5 ACB-IOPHTEX5-000 IOP0 VHI CRP Terminal 8 pair Cable from IOP
ASIO5 Teleph. to VDU
Terminals.
114. TEX6 ACB-IOPHTEX6-000 IOP0 VHI Operator Terminal 8 pair Cable from IOP
ASIO6 Teleph to VDU
Terminals.
115. TEX7 ACB-IOPHTEX7-000 IOP0 VHI Operator Terminal 8 pair Cable from IOP
ASIO7 Teleph. to VDU
Terminals.
116. TEY1 ACB-IOPHTEY1-000 IOPI VHI Console Terminal 8 pair Cable from IOP
(console) Teleph. to VDU
Terminals.
117. TEY2 ACB-IOPHTEY2-000 IOPI VHI CRP Terminal 8 pair Cable from IOP
ASIO2 Teleph. to VDU
Terminals.
118. TEY3 ACB-IOPHTEY3-000 IOPI VHI OOD Terminal 8 pair Cable from IOP
ASIO3 Teleph. to VDU
Terminals.
119. TEY4 ACB-IOPHTEY4-000 IOPI VHI CRP Terminal 8 pair Cable from IOP
ASIO4 Teleph. to VDU
Terminals.
120. TEY5 ACB-IOPHTEY5-000 IOPI VHI CRP Terminal 8 pair Cable from IOP
ASIO5 Teleph. to VDU
Terminals.
121. TEY6 ACB-IOPHTEY6-000 IOPI VHI Operator Terminal 8 pair Cable from IOP
ASIO6 Teleph. to VDU
Terminals.
122. TEY7 ACB-IOPHTEY7-000 IOP1 VHI Operator Terminal 8 pair Cable from IOP
ASIO7 Teleph. to VDU
Terminals.
124. TLYY (YY = ACB-MAXXTLYY-000 As per Table 7/36, Concentration
1 TO 48) 10.22 28AWG flat cables.
125. RCK 0 ACB-NSCERCKX-000 As per Table 4 pair
10.26 (a) sheiled cable
126. RCK1 ACB-NSCERCKX-000 As per Table 4 pair
10.26 (a) sheiled cable
127. RCK2 ACB-NSCERCKX-000 As per Table 4 pair
10.26 (a) sheiled cable
128. BXXX (XXX = ACB-ISTUBNNN-000 As per Table MDF 64 pair Used for ISDN
001 TO 008) 10.44BM BRI cabling.
129. PRXX (XX= ACB-ISTUPRNN-000 BM As per MDF 8 pair Used to ISDN
01 to 16) Table 10.44 sheilded PRI cabling.

Note :
NN denotes BM number. It can take values from 1 to 32.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 311


Chapter 11.

Fuse Details & Placement

11.1. INTRODUCTION
This chapter gives the details and placement of the various fuses and MCBs in a
multimodule exchange. In CM, fuses are present in FFB, NSC and PSU-II cards
and the corresponding power line filters. In a BM, fuses are present in TTC, PSU-I,
PSU-II, TUI, TSI cards and in filter boxes of TUs, TSU and BPU. In a LM, fuses are
present in TUI and PSU-I cards and the filter boxes of TUs. In IOP input fuse is
present. In ADP fuse is present only in the power supply card. FBI cards mounted
on DCDPs, IOP-PDP and suite PDPs contain two fuses each. MCBs/HRC fuses are
located in suite PDP, IOP-PDP and DCDPs.

11.2. FUSES USED IN BM-XL


Sl. No. Rating Type Qty Used/ Part Code Cards
BM-XL.

1. 100 mA Slow blow fuse 2 EFS-00000100-000 TTC

2. 400 mA - do - 8 EFS-00000400-000 PSUI/RGP

3. 1 Amp - do - 8 EFS-00001000-000 TUI

4. 1.6 Amp - do - 2 EFS-00001600-000 TSI

5. 2 Amp - do - 16 EFS-00002000-100 TU Filter Box

6. 4 Amp - do - 12 EFS-00004000-000 PSUI/PSUII

7. 4 Amp - do - 4 EFS-00004000-100 BPU/TSU Filter


Box

INSTALLATION MANUAL 312


FUSE DETAILS & PLACEMENT

11.3. FUSES USED IN LM


Sl. No. Rating Type Qty Used/ Part Code Cards
LM

1. 400 mA Slow blow fuse 12 EFS-00000400-000 PSU-I (RGP)

2. 1 Amp - do - 12 EFS-00001000-000 TUI

3. 2 Amp - do - 24 EFS-00002000-100 TU Filter Box

4. 4 Amp - do - 12 EFS-00004000-000 PSU-I

11.4. FUSES USED IN IOPS (IOP0 & IOP1)


Sl. No. Rating Type Qty Used Part Code

1. 6.3 Amp Fast blow fuse 1 each EFF-00006300-000

11.5. FUSES USED FOR ADP


Sl. No. Rating Type Qty Used Part Code

1. 2 Amp Slow blow fuse 1 EFF-00002000-000

11.6. FUSES USED IN CM-XL


Sl. No. Fuse/MCB Type Qty Reqd. Part Code Card
Rating

1. 1.6Amp Slow blow fuse 2 EFS-00001600-000 FFB

2. 500 mA - do - 6 EFS-00000500-000 FFB

3. 4 Amp - do - 24 EFS-00004000-000 PSUII

4. 630 mA Fast Blow Fuse 2 EFF-00000630-000 NSC

11.7. FUSES/MCBS USED IN SUITE PDP


Sl. No. Rating Type Qty Used/PDP Part Code

1. 400 mA Slow blow fuse 1 EFS-00000400-000

2. 2 Amp Slow blow fuse 1 EFS-00002000-000

3. 2 Amp HRC fuse 2 EFH-00002000-000

4. 16 Amp HRC fuse 16@ EFH-00016000-000

5. 36* Amp HRC fuse 2 EFH-00036000-000

*@ Note
1. 36A HRC fuse will be used in case CM is present in that suite.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 313


Chapter 11.

2. Quantity of 16A fuses will be 14 where CM-XL is installed.

11.8. FUSES/MCBS USED IN IOP-PDP


Sl. No. Rating Type Qty Used Part Code

1. 2 Amp HRC fuse 1 EFH-00002000-000

2. 10 Amp HRC fuse 2 EFH-00010000-000

3. 400 mA Slow blow fuse 1 EFS-00000400-000

4. 2 Amp Slow blow fuse 1 EFS-00002000-000

11.9. FUSES/MCB USED IN DCDP


Sl. No. Rating Type Qty Used/DCDP Part Code

1. 30 Amp MCB 6 EBB-C0100030-110

2. 120 Amp MCB 10 EBB-C0100120-110

3. 400 mA Slow blow fuse 1 EFS-00000400-000

4. 2 Amp Slow blow fuse 1 EFS-00002000-000

11.10. CONSOLIDATED LIST OF FUSES AND MCBS


Sl. No. Rating Type Unit Location Code Physical
Placement

1. 100 mA Slow blow fuse BM-XL TU TTC card

2. 400 mA - do - BM-XL, LM TU PSU-I

IOP-PDP } FBI
DCDPs }
Suite PDP }

3. 500 mA - do - CM-XL Top hat FFB

4. 630 mA Fast blow fuse CM-XL SCU NSC

5. 1 Amp - do - BM-XL, LM TU TUI Card


#7SU

6. 1.6 Amp Slow blow fuse BM-XL, CM-XL TSU, FFB TSI, FFB

2 Amp - do - BM-XL, LM TU busbar, ADP Filter box, APS


(6x32 mm)

2 Amp PDP (Suite) FBI Card


(5x20 mm) IOP-PDP DCDPs

7. 4 Amp Slow blow fuse BM-XL, TSU, BPU Filter box


(6x32)

314 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


FUSE DETAILS & PLACEMENT

Sl. No. Rating Type Unit Location Code Physical


Placement

4 Amp BM-XL, LM TSU, BPU, TU PSU II & I


(5x20 mm) CM-XL All frames Bus PSU II
bars power line
filters

8. 6.3 Amp Fast Blow Fuse IOP Fuse Holder

9. 2 Amp HRC fuse Suite PDP & IOP Suite PDP &
PDP IOP-PDP

10. 10 Amp HRC fuse IOP-PDP IOP-PDP

11. 16 Amp HRC fuse Suite PDP Suite PDP

12. 36 Amp HRC Fuse Suite PDP -- Suite PDP

13. 30 Amp MC B DCDP -- DCDP

14. 120 Amp MCB DCDP DCDP

Fuses Used in ISTU


Sl. No. Rating Type Unit Location Code Physical
Placement

1. 4 Amp Slow blow fuse 4 EFS-00004000-100 ISTU Filter


Boxes

2. 4 Amp Slow blow fuse 2 EFS-00004000-000 PSU II

Fuses Used in SUM Unit


Sl. No. Rating Type Unit Location Code Physical
Placement

1. 4 Amp Slow blow fuse 4 EFS-00004000-100 SUM Filter


Boxes

2. 4 Amp Slow blow fuse 4 EFS-00004000-000 PSUII

INSTALLATION MANUAL 315


Chapter 12.

Operator Positions
(Information will be provided later)

INSTALLATION MANUAL 316


Chapter 13.

Invertor Arrangement

13.1. INTRODUCTION
Three 1 KVA inverters are provided to meet uninterrupted AC requirements of the
VDUs (Visual Display Unit) and the printers in IOP room, OMC room and the MDF
room (Test positions). All the three inverters will be in use to meet IOP room, OMC
room and MDF room power requirements. Although no spare inverter has been
provided to handle failure of any of the inverters, the output of the three inverters
has been distributed in such a fashion that in case of failure of any of the inverters,
the other two inverters will be able to handle the total load. In OMC room 4 CRP
terminals and two printer terminals will be provided out of which two terminals
and one printer will be connected to IOP-0 and other two CRP terminals and printer
will be connected to IOP-1. In addition to that two more operator terminals (test
positions) will be provided in MDF room.

13.2. INVERTER INPUT


Normally -48V input to inverters 1 & 2 is tapped from DCDP1 and for inverter 3
from DCDP2. However if DCDP2 is not installed, inverter 3 may also be connected
to DCDP1.

13.3. INVERTER OUTPUT SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION


The arrangement of distribution boards (DB) has been shown in Fig. 13.1 for
catering power supply to the terminals and printers from inverters. Distribution
boards DB1 & DB2 are provided in IOP room for catering two console terminals.
Distribution boards DB3 to DB6 have been provided in the wall in OMC room at a
height of about 20 cm from the floor. Similarly distribution boards DB7 and DB8
have been provided in MDF room on the wall at about 20 cm height from floor. The
output of inverter 1 is terminated on DB1, the detail of DB1 is explained in Fig.
13.1 (detail of A). All the distribution boards DB1 to DB8 are identical. DB1 is
parallel with DB4 and DB7 so that inverter 1 output is available at DB4 and DB7.
Now inverter 2 output is terminated at DB2 in IOP room and DB2 is parallel to
DB5 at OMC room and DB8 at MDF room. Similarly inverter 3 output is
terminated at DB3 in OMC room and DB3 is paralleled to DB6 in OMC room. In
such case, two DB points (ex. DB1 & DB2 etc.) coming from two inverters are put

317 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


Chapter 13.

318 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


INVERTOR ARRANGEMENT

very close together such that in case any fault occurs in any inverter, terminals
supply can be tapped from adjacent DB, connected with the other inverter.
When all the three inverters are working, then the distribution of inverters to VDUs
and printers can be given as per the table 13.1. In case of failure of any one of the
inverters, supply can be trapped from the nearest inverter.
Note :
Inverters' output ground should not be extended to DBs. i.e. only line and
neutral are to be connected to VDUs and printers.
Table 13.1

VDUs & Printer Corresponding Inverter


VDU1 INV-1
VDU2 INV-2
VDU3 INV-3
VDU4 INV-3
VDU5 INV-2
VDU6 INV-2
VDU7 INV-1
VDU8 INV-2
PRN1 INV-1
PRN2 INV-3

INSTALLATION MANUAL 319


Chapter 14.

Sign Writing

14.1. INTRODUCTION
A multimodule exchange has different types of cabinets (ex. Base Modules, Line
Modules and Central Module). For the purpose of easy maintenance and trouble
shooting of faults proper identification of cabinets is very much essential. Actually
this identification marking or "SIGN WRITING" has to be put at site to identify a
particular cabinet. The format used for this purpose is explained below. This is also
supported by fig. 14.1 & 14.2.

14.2. SIGN WRITING FORMAT


ON EVERY SUITE (Vertical Pillar)
SUITE : x
CABINETS : y-BMzz-w
ON TOP PLATE OF EVERY CABINET
Suite No-Cabinet No. Type of Cabinet BM No-Rack No.
x-y cc BMzz-w
Notes:
1. x Can assume any value between 1 to 5.
2. y Can assume any value between 1 to 8.
3. cc Can be either BM or LM or CM.
4. w Can assume any value between 1 to 3.
5. zz Can assume any value between 01 to 32.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 320


SIGN WRITING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 321


Chapter 14.

322 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


Chapter 15.

VDU & Printer Setting

15.1. INTRODUCTION
This chapter gives details on settings of different parameters of VDU and printer.
In case VDU or printer is not functioning properly, check for these
parameters/switch setting before attempting any repair.

15.2. VDU SETTING


Switch `ON' the VDU terminal and enter setup mode by pressing `F3'. There are
seven different set-ups listed below :
i) Display Set-up
ii) Special Set-up
iii) General Set-up
iv) Communication Set-up
v) Printer Set-up
vi) Keyboard Set-up
vii) Tab Set-up
Parameters for each set-up are listed below. These are specifically for a VXL VM-
2620 terminal.
i) Display Set-up

80 columns
Interpret controls
Auto wrap
Jump scroll
Light text, Dark screen
Intensity = 10

323 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


Chapter 15.

Cursor
Block cursor style
Time display
Status line = ON
ii) Special Set-up

/- = /
-/_ = -/_
=/+ = =/+
(x = (x
(/ ) = (/ )
,/, = ,/,
./. = ./.
CR pad off
Edit/Arrow/PF Keys Active
iii) General Set-up

VT200 mode, 7 bit controls


VT200 ID
User defined keys locked
User features unlocked
Standard mode
Numeric key pad
Normal cursor keys
No new line
Auto CRT save
iv) Communication Set-up

Transmit = 9600
Receive = Transmit
x off at 64

324 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


VDU & PRINTER SETTING

8 bits, no parity
1 stop bit
No local echo
EIA port, data leads only
Disconnect, 2s delay
Limited transmit
v) Printer Set-up

Speed = 9600
Normal print mode
X off
8 bits, no parity
1 stop bit
Print full page
Print National only
No terminator
vi) Keyboard Set-up

Typewriter keys
Caps lock
F1-F5 no lock
Auto Repeat
Key click
Margin bell
Warning bell
Break
Auto Answer Back
Answer Back =
Not concealed

INSTALLATION MANUAL 325


Chapter 15.

vii) Tab Set-up

Note :
For tab setting, move the cursor to `Clear All Tabs' and hit `Enter' key. Then
move the cursor to `Set 8 Columns Tabs' and hit `Enter'. The first `T' should
appear at position 9 and the rest should be at intervals of 8.

15.3. PRINTER SETTING


Setting Communication between IOP and Printer requires the following
Baud rate : 9600
Databits : 8
Parity : No Parity
Stop bits : 1
Following is a typical example of switch settings for a EX-1050 Wipro make printer.
DIP SWITCH GROUP-I
SWITCH NUMBER SETTING TO BE DONE
1-1 DOWN
1-2 UP
1-3 DOWN
1-4 DOWN
1-5 DOWN
1-6 UP
1-7 UP
1-8 UP
DIP SWITCH GROUP-II
SWITCH NUMBER SETTING TO BE DONE
2-1 UP
2-2 DOWN
2-3 DOWN
2-4 DOWN

326 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


VDU & PRINTER SETTING

2-5 UP
2-6 UP
2-7 DOWN
2-8 DOWN
Note : UP means ON

DOWN means OFF

INSTALLATION MANUAL 327


Chapter 16.

Jumper Settings

16.1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the types of jumpers used in MAX-XL cards and the
position of required shorts.

16.2. DESCRIPTION OF JUMPER TYPES


There are three types of jumper settings in MAX-XL cards. They are described
individually with an example.
2 Pin Jumpers (2P)
In this type of jumper settings, there are only 2 pins and the instruction required is
whether the jumper position needs to be shorted or not to be shorted.

Example :
In APC-MSC014/F-S07, W1 and W4 are two pin Jumpers
W1 - To be shorted
W4 - Not to be shorted
3 Pin Jumpers (3P)
In this type of jumper settings, there are 3 pins and the instruction required is
whether the jumper position needs to be shorted or not. If shorting is needed further
instruction should be which 2 pins (out of the total 3 pins) are required to be
shorted.

Example :
In APC-TGA077/T-S02 W1 and W2 are 3 pin jumpers.
W1 - Has to be shorted for position `bc'
W2 - Has to be shorted for position `bc'.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 328


JUMPER SETTINGS

Grouped Jumpers (GP)


In this type of jumper settings, there are more than one number of 2/3 pin jumpers
and the instruction required is which two pins have to be shorted for all the jumpers
belonging to the group.
Note :
In all of the above type of jumper settings, the reference is made keeping the card
such that the ejector side is at LHS and the connector side is at RHS as viewed from
the component side. For further information, Assembly Diagram (AD) of the
respective cards can be referred to.

16.3. JUMPER SETTINGS IN BM-XL/LM


Following are the card types with current versions (requiring jumper settings) used
in BM/LM and their respective slots.
SL. NO. CARD TYPE WITH VERSION FRAME SLOTS
1. APC-ANN078/T-S03 TU, DTU 3
2. APC-BPC441/O-S02 BPU 12, 15
3. APC-BME442/H-S02 BPU 7, 20
4. APC-TIC002/F-S10 TU 11, 15
TSU 6, 21
5. APC-MSC014/F-S07 TSU 9, 18
6. APC-MSD013/F-S06 TSU 8, 19
7. APC-MFC043/F-S08 TSU 4, 5
22, 23
8. APC-TGA077/T-S02 TSU 3, 24
9. APC-TSC008/F-S06 TSU 12, 15
10. APC-TUI084/T-S03 TU 13, 14
DTU 12, 15
11. APC-TUC046/T-S03 DTU 11, 16
12. APC-TUB003/T-M04 TU Copy 0/1
13. APC-BPU438/H-M01 BPU COPY-0
14. APC-BPU439/H-M01 BPU COPY-1

INSTALLATION MANUAL 329


Chapter 16.

16.3.1. APC-ANN078/T-S03
JUMPER SHORTING POSITION
W1 Horizontal
(Lower Position)
W2 Horizontal
(Lower Position)
W3 Horizontal
(Lower Position)

16.3.2. APC-BPC441/O-S02
JUMPER POSITION REMARKS
W19 b & c or 2 & 3
W20 b & c or 2 & 3
W21 b & c or 2 & 3
W22 to W29 b & c or 2 & 3 For single ended links

16.3.3. APC-BME442/H-S02

Jumpers W1 & W4 should be shorted.


W2, W3 Jumpers are to be left open.

16.3.4. APC-TIC002/F-S10
W1 should be shorted for 27C512 in U75
W1 should be left open for 27C256 in U75.

16.3.5. APC-MSC014/F-S07
To be shorted - W1
Not to be shorted - W4

16.3.6. APC-MSD013/F-S06

3 Pin Jumpers : (All 3 pin jumpers are to be shorted)


JUMPER SHORTING POSITION FIGURE
W1-W8 BMS
W9 A Position oB
|
oA
W13 A Position A o--o oB

330 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


JUMPER SETTINGS

Grouped Jumpers
JUMPER SHORTING POSITION FIGURE

W10 BMS W12 W11

W11 A Position B A B A
o o
| |
W12 A Position o o o o

W14 BMS

16.3.7. APC-MFC043/F-S08
JUMPER SHORTING POSITION

W5 Top 1-2

W6 Right 2-3

W7 Bottom 2-3

16.3.8. APC-TGA077/T-S02
JUMPER SHORTING POSITION

W1 Horizontal
(b-c)

W2 Horizontal
(b-c)

16.3.9. APC-TSC008/F-S06
JUMPER SHORTING POSITION

W1 Middle
(A-b)

16.3.10. APC-TUI084/T-S03
JUMPER SHORTING POSITION

For W1 B-b, D-d


TUX1
W5 B-b, D-d

For W1 B-b, D-d


TUX2
W4 A-a, C-c

For W2 B-b, D-d


TUX3
W5 A-a, C-c

INSTALLATION MANUAL 331


Chapter 16.

JUMPER SHORTING POSITION

For W2 B-b, D-d


TUX4
W4 A-a, C-c

X = 1, 2, 3, 4

16.3.11. APC-TUC046/T-S03
JUMPER SHORTING POSITION

W2 Bottom
(b-c)

16.3.12. APC-TUB003/T-M04
JUMPER SHORTING FUNCTION
POSITION

W1, W3 Left For TUX1

Right For TUX2

Left For TUX3

Right For TUX4

W2, W4 Right For TUX1

Right For TUX2

Left For TUX3

Left For TUX4

C1 C0

W3 W1

W4 W2

Note : TU* Motherboard as viewed from the rear side.

332 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


JUMPER SETTINGS

16.3.13. APC-BPU438/H-M01

COPY-0
LSB

0 W13 4 W9

1 W14 5 W10

2 W15 6 W11

3 W16 7 W12

MSB

JUMPER SETTINGS FOR W9-W16 (BPU COPY 0)


BM NO. SHORTING POSITION FUNCTION
1 W9,W10,W11,W12,W13,W14, W15,W16 Copy id = 00
2 W9,W10,W11,W12,W13, W15,W16 = 02
3 W9,W10,W11,W12,W13,W14, W16 = 04
4 W9,W10,W11,W12,W13,W16 = 06
5 W9,W10,W11,W12,W13,W14, W15 = 08
6 W9,W10,W11,W12,W13,W15 = 0A
7 W9,W10,W11,W12,W13,W14 = 0C
8 W9,W10,W11,W12,W13 = 0E
9 W10,W11,W12,W13,W14,W15, W16 = 10
10 W10,W11,W12,W13,W15,W16 = 12
11 W10,W11,W12,W13,W14,W16 = 14
12 W10,W11,W12,W13,W16 = 16
13 W10,W11,W12,W13,W14,W15 = 18
14 W10,W11,W12,W13,W15 = 1A
15 W10,W11,W12,W13,W14 = 1C
16 W10,W11,W12,W13 = 1E
17 W9,W11,W12,W13,W14,W15, W16 = 20
18 W9,W11,W12,W13,W15,W16 = 22
19 W9,W11,W12,W13,W14,W16 = 24
20 W9,W11,W12,W13,W16 = 26

INSTALLATION MANUAL 333


Chapter 16.

BM NO. SHORTING POSITION FUNCTION


21 W9,W11,W12,W13,W14,W15 Copy id = 28
22 W9,W11,W12,W13,W15 = 2A
23 W9,W11,W12,W13,W14 = 2C
24 W9,W11,W12,W13 = 2E
25 W11,W12,W13,W14,W15,W16 = 30
26 W11,W12,W13,W15,W16 = 32
27 W11,W12,W13,W14,W16 = 34
28 W11,W12,W13,W16 = 36
29 W11,W12,W13,W14,W15 = 38
30 W11,W12,W13,W15 = 3A
31 W11,W12,W13,W14 = 3C
32 W11,W12,W13 = 3E

Note :
* The mentioned jumpers should be shorted
* The jumpers not mentioned to be left open
* For RBM (RSU) W12 (i.e. MSB) to be left upon.

16.3.14. APC-BPU439/H-M01

COPY-1
LSB

0 W21 4 W17

1 W22 5 W18

2 W23 6 W19

3 W24 7 W20

MSB

334 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


JUMPER SETTINGS

JUMPER SETTINGS FOR W17-W24 (BPU COPY 1 id)


BM NO. SHORTING POSITION FUNCTION
1 W17,W18,W19,W20,W22, W23,W24 Copy id = 01
2 W17,W18,W19,W20,W23,W24 = 03
3 W17,W18,W19,W20,W22,W24 = 05
4. W17,W18,W19,W20,W24 = 07
5 W17,W18,W19,W20,W22,W23 = 09
6 W17,W18,W19,W20,W23 = 0B
7 W17,W18,W19,W20,W22 = 0D
8 W17,W18,W19,W20 = 0F
9 W18,W19,W20,W22,W23,W24 = 11
10 W18,W19,W20,W23,W24 = 13
11 W18,W19,W20,W22,W24 = 15
12 W18,W19,W20,W24 = 17
13 W18,W19,W20,W22,W23 = 19
14 W18,W19,W20,W23 = 1B
15 W18,W19,W20,W22 = 1D
16 W18,W19,W20 = 1F
17 W17,W19,W20,W22,W23,W24 = 21
18 W17,W19,W20,W23,W24 = 23
19 W17,W19,W20,W22,W24 = 25
20 W17,W19,W20,W24 = 27
21 W17,W19,W20,W22,W23 Copy id = 29
22 W17,W19,W20,W23 = 2B
23 W17,W19,W20,W22 = 2D
24 W17,W19,W20 = 2F
25 W19,W20,W22,W23,W24 = 31
26 W19,W20,W23,W24 = 33
27 W19,W20,W22,W24 = 35
28 W19,W20,W24 = 37
29 W19,W20,W22,W23 = 39
30 W19,W20,W23 = 3B
31 W19,W20,W22 = 3D
32 W19,W20 = 3F

INSTALLATION MANUAL 335


Chapter 16.

Note :
* The mentioned jumpers should be shorted
* The jumpers not mentioned to be left open
* For RBM (RSU) W20 (i.e. MSB) to be left open.

16.3.15. Jumper Settings for ISTU Motherboard

Part Code : APC-ILM403/H-M00


Only "ITC ID" an "ICC ID" jumpers to be put according to the ISTU position.
Other jumpers to be left open.
Note :
Bit 0 is assumed to be '0' and not available for setting, '7' jumpers are
available for ITC/ICC setting.
i) When ISTU is in 2nd TU position.
\\\\ ITC ID = A8

\\\\

\\\\

\\\\

\\\\

\\\\

\\\\

\\\\

336 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


JUMPER SETTINGS

\\\\ ICC ID = C2
\\\\
\\\\
\\\\
\\\\
\\\\
\\\\
\\\\

ii) When ISTU is in 3rd TU position.


\\\\ ITC ID = B0
\\\\
\\\\
\\\\
\\\\
\\\\

\\\\
\\\\

\\\\
\\\\
ICC ID = C4
\\\\
\\\\
\\\\
\\\\
\\\\
\\\\

INSTALLATION MANUAL 337


Chapter 16.

Legend = Open

\\\\ = Short

\\\\

ISTU Position ICC id jumper setting on ITC id jumper setting on back


at back plane plane

TU11 (T101) W5,W7 short W14,W15 short

TU21 (T105) W3,W5,W7 short W9,W14,W15 short

TU31 (T109) W4,W5,W7 short W10,W14,W15 short

W1o o W9 o o
W2 o o W10 o o
W3 o o W11 o o
W4 o o W12 o o
W5 o o W13 o o
W6 o o W14 o o
W7 o o W15 o o
ICC ITC

16.3.16. Jumper Settings for SUM Unit

16.3.16.1.a) SUM jumper-ID should be 5E (in copy0) and 5F (in copy1). Accordingly
following jumpers are to be put on the SUM motherboard.
7SU Copy0 7SU copy1
W1 Close W13 Open
W2 Open W14 Open
W3 Open W15 Open
W4 Open W16 Open
W5 Open W17 Open
W6 Close W18 Close
W7 Open W19 Open

338 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


JUMPER SETTINGS

W8 Close W20 Close


b) The TUC jumper setting will be according to the position where the
7SU frame is put --
Principal TU 1st Conc. TU 2nd Conc. TU 3rd Conc. TU

W9&W11 Close Open Close Open

W10&W12 Close Close Open Open

16.3.16.2. The TUI card jumper setting will be as per the position of the SUM.
Note :
a) At present the SUM should preferably be put in principal TU.
Moreover if SUM is in BM-1, DM2 should not be an RSU.
b) It HPC is used in place of BPC in SUM then BME card jumper setting
to be as follows :
W2 & W3 should be shorted and W1, W4 to be left open.

16.4. JUMPER SETTINGS IN CM-XL


Following are the card types with current versions (requiring jumper settings) used
in CM-XL and their respective slots.
SL. NO. CARD TYPE WITH FRAME NO. SLOTS
VERSION (NAME)
1. APC-PSM383/F-S02 1 (BTU0) 4 5 to 12 & 15 to 22
(BTU1) 5 to12 & 15 to 22
2. APC-BPC441/O-S02 5 (SCU) 6 12, 15
(HPU) 12, 15
3. APC-BME442/H-S02 5 (SCU) 6, 21
6 (HPU) 11, 16
4. APC-CBX380/H-S01 5 (SCU) 8, 19
5. APC-CCK381/F-S02 5 (SCU) 5,22
6. APC-NSC369/H-A01 5 (SCU) 9, 16
7. APC-SCU362/H-M02 5 (SCU) C0-MOTHER BOARD
8. APC-SCU363/H-M02 5 (SCU) C1-MOTHER BOARD
9. APC-HPU395/H-M00 6 (HPU) C0-MOTHER BOARD
10. APC-HPU396/H-M00 6 (HPU) C1-MOTHER BOARD
11. APC-ESM397/H-S01 1 (BTU0) 5 to 12 & 15 to 22
4 (BTU1) 5 to 12 & 15 to 22

INSTALLATION MANUAL 339


Chapter 16.

16.4.1. APC-PSM383/F-S02

2 PIN JUMPERS : (In all slots)


Jumpers W8, W12, W18, W29 are to be shorted
Pin Nos. 2 & 3 of W22 (Right ) to be shorted
Pin Nos. 1 & 2 of W9,W23,W30 (left ) to be shorted

16.4.2. APC-BPC441/O-S02

Pin Nos. 2 & 3 of W19, W20 are to be shorted


Pin Nos. 1 & 2 of W21 to be shorted for SCU or HPU
Pin Nos. 1 & 2 of W22 to W29 to be shorted for SCU/HPU

16.4.3. APC-BME442/H-S02

Pin Nos. 1 & 2 of W1 and W4 are to be shorted. For BPU, SCU, HPU and
#7SU with BPC.
W2, W3 jumpers are to be left open.
Pin Nos. 1 & 2 of W2 and W3 are to be shorted for #7SU with HPC. W1 & W4
to be left open.

16.4.4. APC-CBX380/H-S01

Pin Nos. 2 & 3 of W3 to be shorted.


Jumpers W1, W2 & W4 are to be left open.

16.4.5. APC-CCK381/F-S02

Pin No. a & b of W1 to be shorted.

16.4.6. (a) APC-NSC369/H-A01

Pin Nos. a & b of W1 and b & c of W2 are to be shorted.


(b) APC-CHD370/F-S01
Pin Nos. a & b of W1 to be shorted.

16.4.7. APC-SCU362/H-M02 (Mother Board of 5th Frame Copy 0 side )

Jumpers W1, W2, W5, W7, W8, W9, W12 are to be shorted
For jumpers W1 & W2 refer figure 16.1.

340 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


JUMPER SETTINGS

16.4.8. APC-SCU363/H-M02 (Mother Board of 5th Frame Copy 1 side)


Jumpers W13, W16, W17, W19, W21, W22,W23,W24 are to be shorted.
For jumpers W23 & W24 refer Figure 16.1.

16.4.9. APC-HPU395/H-M00 (Mother Board of 6th Frame Copy 0 side)


Jumpers W1, W2, W3, W6, W8, W10 are to be shorted.

16.4.10. APC-HPU396/H-M00 (Mother Board of 6th Frame Copy 1 side)


Jumpers W14, W16, W18, W19, W20 are to be shorted.
For Jumpers W19 and W20 refer Figure 16.2

16.4.11. APC-ESM397/H-S01
2 PIN JUMPERS (In all slots)
Jumpers W11, W21, W22, W24 are to be shorted. Rest of the Jumpers are to
be left open.

16.5. JUMPER SETTINGS IN IOP

16.5.1. APC-VHC358/O-S00
Jumpers W13, W14, W15, W17, W18 are to be shorted. Rest of the jumpers
are to be kept open.

16.5.2. APC-VHI359/F-S00

16.5.3. Jumper Settings in Hard Disk


1. Quantum - Model TM 1280S (1.2 GB)
A0 - Open
A1 - Open
A2 - Short
Rest of the Jumpers should not be disturbed.

16.5.4. Jumper Settings of Cartridge Tape Drive


a) 150 MB (5150 ES) of Wangtek Corporation, USA Refer Fig. 16.3.
Jumpers E5, E2, E1 to be shorted.
In J10 2nd pin (column) should be shorted and remaining are all open.
Jumper E20 and J32 are open.
b) TDC 3660 Tape Drive of Tandberg
No jumper settings.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 341


Chapter 16.

342 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


JUMPER SETTINGS

INSTALLATION MANUAL 343


Chapter 16.

344 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


Chapter 17.

Power-ON Procedure

17.1. INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the power on procedure of the C-DOT MAX-XL system. This
procedure is to be followed after installation has been done as per Chapters 1 to 16
of this manual. It should be ensured that no cards are to be inserted in any of the
cabinets at this stage. MCBs or fuses at DCDPs, PDP and IOP-PDP should be in
"OFF" position and power cables should be disconnected from switching cubicle.
This activity can be sub divided into following groups in sequence.
• Visual Inspection
• Electrical Tests

17.2. VISUAL INSPECTION


96 pin Euro connectors on the mother-board of terminal units of modules should be
straight and rigidly mounted such that an easy jacking in of cards are possible. The
movement of cards into the slots should be free.
• There should not be any shorting of any pin in the Euro-connector (96 pins) at
the back-plane as well as at the front side where we insert the cards.
• Bus bars extended over switching cubicle should be coated with proper colour
(Red & Blue).
• All the power and ground cable lugs should be terminated tightly. There should
not be any loose termination.
• Check whether all -48V filter boxes are properly mounted or not. In addition to
this all filter box fuses should be checked for their rating in BMs, LMs & CM.
MCB/Fuse rating of suite PDPs and IOP-PDP are to be checked also. Also verify
the polarity of filter boxes.
• Ensure that all filter boxes are rigidly fixed to the -48V bus bars.
• Remove the protections provided for disk and cartridge drive of both the IOPs.
They should be visually inspected whether they have any, scratches, damages
etc. All the cables terminated on IOPs should be properly connected.

345 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


Chapter 17.

• Opening the ADP back panel, visual checking is to be done on it to see whether
any damage has taken place during transportation.

17.3. ELECTRICAL TESTS


Before powering on the system some important tests are to be performed which are
described as follows:
• Verify A.C and D.C earth resistance with which system is to be connected. Earth
resistances are to be checked by 500V D.C Meggar. DC Earth resistance should
be less than 1 Ohm. Moreover, there should be separate A.C and D.C earth pits.
Inverters' A.C grounding should be done through separate A/C earth pit.
• Ensure that inverters output ground is not connected to VDUs and printers.
• Check for any short between -48V & -48V GND at PDP copy 0 and copy 1 (with
MCBs at DCDPs in "OFF position). Repeat this step keeping MCBs at DCDPs in
"ON" position. (-48V I/P from switching cubicles should not be fed during this
step).
• Insert all the cards in their respective slots in BMs, LMs and CM as per the
equipage list. Ensure that the cards are not jacked into the slots at this stage.
• There should not be any loose fitting of fuses in PDPs and filter boxes and FBI
cards. All filter boxes should be properly mounted.
• Shorting stubs on FBI cards should be thoroughly verified from installation
manual.
• Printer cables and terminal cables are to be checked whether the cable
connection is proper. After doing all these inspections and checkings, make the
power supply through upto DCDPs. During power on of DCDPs, it should be
ensured that all the HRC fuses are removed from all suite PDPs and IOP-PDP.
• Now insert the HRC fuse at PDP for first cabinet.
• Switch off all PSU-I, PSU-II Cards in first cabinet. Check the voltage at
switching cubicle and then at suite PDP bus bars. Voltage drop should not be
more than 1 Volt.
• Now jack in PSU-I, PSU-II cards of all the frames. Jack in all the other cards
after this. Switch on the PSU-I and PSU-II.
• Repeat this exercise for all cabinets in all suites by putting HRC fuses in PDPs
of all suites.
• Switch on all PSU cards in all BMs, LMs and CM. Check whether all LEDs in
PSU cards and on filter boxes are glowing properly. If there is any relay
chattering in any of the LCC Cards or TWT Cards, jack out and jack in of these
cards are to be done.

346 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


POWER-ON PROCEDURE

• Check for the voltages -48V (Voice), - 48V (Load) and -48V(Ring) with respect to
-48V GND at the back plane and check for the polarity also.
• Switch on the supply from MCB for IOP 0 and IOP-1 at IOP- PDP.
• Switch on IOPs and check -48V LED on rear side is glowing and run LED on
front panel is blinking.
• After power-on of the system, yellow LEDs on all FBI cards (suite PDPs, DCDPs
& IOP-PDP) should glow. In suite-PDP FBI card, if any red LED glows check the
filter box daisy-chain connection upto its termination to FBI Card corresponding
to the particular BM or CM or LM. FBI Card jumper setting should be verified.
For CM, FFB on top hat jumper settings should be verified also to detect fan
failure alarm (visual) on suite PDP FBI card to which CM is connected. All fuses
on PDPs are to be checked also.

When all the electrical testings are over, start software loading as per the
procedure given in the "Exchange Operation" manual. Here data cartridge to be
used is "BARE MINIMUM DATA CARTRIDGE" supplied along with the
software deliverables.
• Do all preliminary testing of IOPs as per the "Acceptance Testing" document.

Now, for functional testing of the total system refer to "FUNCTIONAL


TESTING" Chapter 18 of Installation manual.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 347


Chapter 18.

Functional Testing

18.1. INTRODUCTION
This chapter gives the functional testing procedure of the CDOT MAX-XL system.
This procedure is to be followed once installation and power-on have been completed
as per Chapters 1 to 17 of this manual. The detailed testing of MAX-XL is done in
the following order.
Software Installation on IOP
Administrative Module (AM) Testing
Space Switch Controller Unit (SCU) Testing
Bus Termination Unit (BTU) Testing
Space Switch Unit (SSU) Testing
BM Testing through CM
System Initialisation in Different Configurations
Inter BM Testing
Alarm Testing
System Stability
Load Testing

18.2. SOFTWARE INSTALLATION


This section describes the software installation on CDOT IOP i.e. copying exchange
software on to IOP disks.
Before starting the software installation make sure that all the diagnostic
commands which are mentioned in Acceptance Testing manual are running
properly. Now load the exchange software by strictly following the software
installation procedure which is explained in DSS MAX EXCHANGE OPERATIONS
Manual.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 348


FUNCTIONAL TESTING

18.3. AM TESTING

18.3.1. AP Downloading

Set up
IOP-0 INS-ACT (inservice active).
Connect VDU Terminals on AP-0 and AP-1 through BP terminal cable
(Refer section 10.6.4 for details on BP terminal cable).
HPU is fully equipped but power is OFF.
ADP is connected.

1. Switch on ADP and perform self Tests on ADP.


2. Switch on all four PSUs in HPU and check that LEDs of all PSUs are
glowing.
3. Ensure that power-on tests for AP-0 and AP-1 are successfully
completed.
4. Give reset on AP-1 and make sure that AP-0 has started the code
loading with both the ports enabled. Message P0-1E will come on AP-0
terminal.
5. Wait for some time so that few blocks of code are loaded i.e. 0K, 36K,
72K. Hence AP-0 (--) IOP-0 link is tested.
6. Press reset on AP-0, link between AP-0 (--) IOP-0 is broken. AP-1
should take over code loading with both memories enabled. Message
will come as P0-1E on AP-1 terminal.
7. Wait for some time so that a few blocks of code are loaded through AP-
1, therefore AP-1 (-- ) IOP-0 link is also OK.
8. Now give a reset to AP-1 and check that AP-0 has taken over code
loading and wait for the AM to come up.
9. When AM comes up, check the status of all units of AM. They should
be inservice. There should be critical alarms for CM and IOP on ADP.
All units of AM are AP-0, AP-1, MU-0, MU-1 & ADC. (Assume that
BMs are not equipped).
10. Bring IOP-0 in warm state and make IOP-1 INS-ACT.
11. Repeat steps 2 to 10 with second IOP-1.
If all the above test cases pass then AP-IOP links fully tested.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 349


Chapter 18.

18.4. AM DIAGNOSTICS

18.4.1. AP Diagnostics

Set up
IOP-0 INS-ACT.
AM is fully initialised and all units are inservice.
ADP is connected.

1. Make AP-0 OOS-OPR, AP-1 should be INS-ACT. Check the


alarm on ADP for AM.
2. Give a command DGN-SWU for AP-0. If diagnostics are okayed
bring the AP-0 inservice through PUT-SWU-INS command.
There should not be any alarm on ADP for AM. If diagnostics
don't pass, take appropriate action and give diagnostics again.
3. Interchange the AP, no unit should go to suspect.
4. Make AP-1 OOS-OPR, AP-0 should be INS-ACT, check the
alarm on ADP for AM.
5. Repeat step 2 for AP-1.

18.4.2. Memory Diagnostics

Set up
Same as in 18.4.1
1. Make AP-0 INS-ACT and AP-1 INS-SBY
2. Give command PUT-SWU-OOS for MU-0, alarm should appear on
ADP for AM.
3. Give command DGN-SWU for MU-0. DGN pass/fail report for MUs will
come on OOD. If DGN passes, bring MU-0 inservice by PUT-SWU-INS
command. If DGN fails take suitable action and run diagnostics again.
There should not be any alarm on ADP for AM.
4. Make MU-1 OOS-OPR
5. Repeat step 3 for MU-1
6. Interchange APs
7. Repeat steps 2 to 5 again for both copies of memories with AP-1 active.

350 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


FUNCTIONAL TESTING

18.5. SCU TESTING

18.5.1. SSC Downloading

Set up
IOP-0 is INS-ACT
AP completely initialised, its all units are inservice, AP-0 INS-ACT, AP-1
INS-SBY. All HMS cards in HPU are jacked in.
All the cards are equipped in SCU and all four PSUs are switched off
Connect VDU Terminals on both SSC controllers through BP terminal
cable.

Each SSC has links to all the four CMSs (HMSs) but AP has links only to
CMS1 and CMS2. SSC code loading take place through active AP via CMS1
or CMS2. For complete testing of SSC initialisation with active AP all the
different combinations are to be checked.
1. Switch on four PSUs of SCU and check that LEDs of all PSU's are
glowing.
2. Ensure power-on tests for SSC-0 and SSC-1 are successfully
completed.
3. Give reset on SSC-1 and make sure that SSC-0 has started code
loading. Check the message on SSC-0 terminals for both ports enabled,
i.e., it has access to both memories. Message will come as PO-1E on
SSC-0 terminal.
4. Wait for some time so that a few blocks of code is loaded i.e. 0K, 36K,
72K .....
5. Now give a reset on CMS1 card, (Refer Fig. 18.1 for identification of
switch units and corresponding physical cards) SSC-0 terminal will
print LF 66 and will continue down loading through CMS2.
6. Give reset to CMS2 now SSC-0 terminal will print LF 67 but code
loading will continue through CMS1.
7. Give a reset to SSC-0 now SSC-0 link to active AP is broken, SSC-1
will take over code load through CMS1 and CMS2. Check the message
PO-1E on SSC-1 terminal for both memory ports enabled.
8. Repeat steps 4,5,6 for checking SSC-1 down loading with both CMS1
and CMS2.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 351


Chapter 18.

9. Give a reset to SSC-1 again, SSC-0 will take over code loading and
wait for complete code loading and SCU to come up.
10. Check the status of all units of SCU. All units of CM are SSC-0, SSC-1,
CMS1, CMS2, CMS3, CMS4, SS-0, SS-1, SSBID-0, SSBID-1,
NSC/CLK-0, NSC/CLK-1, MU-0, MU-1. Let SSC-0 be active and SSC-1
standby.
11. Make CMS2 OOS-OPR
12. Give soft start to CM, CM should come up through only available
CMS1.
13. Bring CMS2 inservice
14. Make CMS1 OOS-OPR
15. Give soft start to CM, CM should come up through only available
CMS2.
16. Bring CMS1 inservice
17. Interchange SSC
18. Repeat step 11 to 16
19. Interchange AP
20. Repeat step 3 to 18
Finally all units of AM and CM should be inservice.

18.6. SCU DIAGNOSTICS

18.6.1. SSC Diagnostics

Set up
IOP-0 is INS-ACT
AM, CM completely initialised and all units are inservice
1. Make SSC-0 OOS-OPR, SSC-1 INS-ACT
2. Give a command DGN-SWU for SSC-0. If diagnostics are okayed then
bring SSC-0 inservice by PUT-SWU-INS command. If diagnostics are
failed take appropriate action and give diagnostics again.
3. Interchange SSCs
4. Repeat step 1 to 3 for SSC-1.

352 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


FUNCTIONAL TESTING

18.6.2. Memory Diagnostics

Set up
IOP-0 is INS-ACT
AM, CM completely initialised and all units are inservice.

1. Make SSC-0 INS-ACT, SSC-1 INS-SBY


2. Make MU-0 OOS-OPR, MU-1 INS-ACT
3. Give command DGN-SWU for MU-0. If memory does If
diagnostics are okayed then bring MU-0 inservice by PUT-SWU-
INS command. If diagnostics are failed take appropriate action.
4. Make MU-1 OOS-OPR, MU-0, INS-ACT
5. Repeat step 3 for MU-1
6. Interchange SSC
7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 with SSC-1 active.

18.6.3. Clock Diagnostics

Same as in 18.6.1
Set up
1. Make SSC-0 INS-ACT SSC-1 INS-SBY
2. Make CLK-0 OOS-OPR, CLK-1 INS-ACT
3. Give command PUT-SWU-INS for CLK-0, if clock card does not come
up then run diagnostics on CLK-0 and take appropriate action. Run
diagnostics again if diagnostics are okayed then bring CLK-0 inservice
by put-swu-ins command.
4. Make CLK-1 OOS-OPR, CLK-0 INS-ACT
5. Repeat step 3 for CLK-1
6. Interchange SSC
7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 with SSC-1 active.

18.6.4. CMS Diagnostics

Set up
Same as in 18.6.1
1. Make SSC-0 INS-ACT, SSC-1 INS-SBY

INSTALLATION MANUAL 353


Chapter 18.

2. Make CMS1 OOS-OPR, other CMSs should be inservice


3. Give command DGN-SWU for CMS1. If diagnostics are okayed then
bring CMS1 inservice by PUT-SWU-INS command. If diagnostics are
failed, take appropriate action.
4. Repeat step 2 and 3 for other CMSs also
5. Interchange SSC
6. Repeat step 2 to 3 for all CMSs with SSC-1 INS-ACT

18.7. BM EQUIPPING
Now create the data for all BMs on one IOP through EQUIP-MOD command by
using standard procedure. Procedure is given in Appendix-1.

18.8. BTU TESTING

Set up
IOP-0 is INS-ACT and data of all BMs created.
BM-CM cables are connected
1. Power on BTU and SSU. Ensure required number of IFC
(PSM/ESM) and SWC (PSS) cards are jacked in.
2. Give code load to system. System will come up with all units of
AM and CM inservice.
3. If any unit is Out Of Service (OOS) then run diagnostics for that
unit and bring it inservice by PUT-SWU-INS command.

18.8.1. IFC (PSM/ESM) Diagnostics

Bus Terminal Unit (BTU ) of Central Module Contains local PSM/ESM IFC
cards. Each PSM card caters for two consecutive Base Modules and each
ESM card caters for one local Base Module and one Remote Base Module.
Hence numbers of PSM/ESM cards in BTU depends upon how many Base
Modules (local+Remote) are equipped and what are their positions in the
configuration. If some Base Modules are not equipped then PSM/ESM cards
are not required but at those slots CML cards are put for providing proper
matching of impedances on the Bus for avoiding noise on the Bus. Please
refer Fig. 18.1 for the numbering of PSM/ESM cards in both Buses. Table
18.1 gives the relation between PSM/ESM cards and Base Modules.
Note : Only even numbered BM can be configured as Remote BM.

354 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


FUNCTIONAL TESTING

INSTALLATION MANUAL 355


Chapter 18.

TABLE 18.1
BASE MODULE NUMBER - PSM/ESM CARD NUMBER
S.No. Bus Frame Nos. Base Module Numbers IFC Number (PSM/ESM) Slot No.
1 0 1 1&2 1 5
2 0 1 3&4 2 6
3 0 1 5&6 3 7
4 0 1 7&8 4 8
5 0 1 9 & 10 5 9
6 0 1 11 & 12 6 10
7 0 1 13 & 14 7 11
8 0 1 15 & 16 8 12
9 0 1 17 & 18 9 15
10 0 1 19 & 20 10 16
11 0 1 21 & 22 11 17
12 0 1 23 & 24 12 18
13 0 1 25 & 26 13 19
14 0 1 27 & 28 14 20
15 0 1 29 & 30 15 21
16 0 1 31 & 32 16 22
17 1 4 1&2 17 5
18 1 4 3&4 18 6
19 1 4 5&6 19 7
20 1 4 7&8 20 8
21 1 4 9 & 10 21 9
22 1 4 11 & 12 22 10
23 1 4 13 & 14 23 11
24 1 4 15 & 16 24 12
25 1 4 17 & 18 25 15
26 1 4 19 & 20 26 16
27 1 4 21 & 22 27 17
28 1 4 23 & 24 28 18
29 1 4 25 & 26 29 19
30 1 4 27 & 28 30 20
31 1 4 29 & 30 31 21
32 1 4 31 & 32 32 22

356 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


FUNCTIONAL TESTING

Note :
Corresponding to RBM, ESM card is required in both cases. (e.g. if BM12 is to
be configured as RBM, ESM cards are to be equipped as IFC6 and IFC22 in
bus-0 and bus-1 of BTUs respectively).
Set up
CM is fully initialised and BM-CM cables are connected.

1. Make SSC-0 INS-ACT, SSC-1 INS-SBY.


2. Make IFC1 OOS-OPR.
3. Give command DGN-SWU for IFC1. If diagnostics are okayed
then bring the PSM card inservice by PUT-SWU-INS command.
If diagnostics are failed, take appropriate action.
4. Repeat step and 2 and 3 for all other PSM (IFC) cards which are
equipped.
5. Interchange SSC
6. Repeat step 2 to 4 for all IFC cards with SSC-1 active.

18.9. SSU TESTING

Set up
CM is fully initialised and BM-CM cables are connected

1. Make SSC-0 INS-ACT, SSC-1 INS-SBY.


2. Make the SS-0 (Switch Plane ) OOS-OPR, SS-1 should be INS-
ACT
3. Give command PUT-SWU-INS for Switch Plane SS-0. If
diagnostics are okayed then bring the SS-0 inservice by PUT-
SWU-INS command. If diagnostics are failed, then take
appropriate action by changing the failed card in DGN report.
SS-0 i.e. switch plane 0 means (SSBID-0, CLK-0 all SWCs-0)
and SS-1 means (SSBID-1, CLK-1, SS-1 all SWCs-1). (NSC is
part of CLK).
4. Repeat step 2 & 3 for SS-1
5. Interchange SSC
6. Repeat step 2 to 4 with SSC-1 active.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 357


Chapter 18.

18.10. BM TESTING SET UP


IOP-0 is INS-ACT.
AM and CM fully initialised with date created for required no. of BMs.
Connect VDU Terminals on BP-0 and BP-1 controllers of any BM (say
BM-1) through BP Terminal cable.

1. BM-CM cable of that BM is already connected.


2. Check the back plane id for that BM. (Please refer Table 18.2 for
Back Plane IDs and Sec. 16.3.13 and 16.3.14 for setting these
ids.
TABLE 18.2
Back Plane IDs for Base Modules
S.No. Base Module Number Back-Plane id Copy 0 BPU in Back Plane id Copy 1 BPU
Decimal & Hex in Decimal & Hex

1 1 0 (0x0) 1 (0x1)

2 2 2 (0x2) 3 (0x3)

3 3 4 (0x4) 5 (0x5)

4 4 6 (0x6) 7 (0x7)

5 5 8 (0x8) 9 (0x9)

6 6 10 (0xA) 11 (0xB)

7 7 12 (0xC) 13 (0xD)

8 8 14 (0xE) 15 (0xF)

9 9 16 (0x10) 17 (0x11)

10 10 18 (0x12) 19 (0x13)

11 11 20 (0x14) 21 (0x15)

12 12 22 (0x16) 23 (0x17)

13 13 24 (0x18) 25 (0x19)

14 14 26 (0x1A) 27 (0x1B)

15 15 28 (0x1C) 29 (0x1D)

16 16 30 (0x1E) 31 (0x1F)

17 17 32 (0x20) 33 (0x21)

18 18 34 (0x22) 35 (0x23)

358 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


FUNCTIONAL TESTING

S.No. Base Module Number Back-Plane id Copy 0 BPU in Back Plane id Copy 1 BPU
Decimal & Hex in Decimal & Hex

19 19 36 (0x24) 37 (0x25)

20 20 38 (0x26) 39 (0x27)

21 21 40 (0x28) 41 (0x29)

22 22 42 (0x2A) 43 (0x2B)

23 23 44 (0x2C) 45 (0x2D)

24 24 46 (0x2E) 47 (0x2F)

25 25 48 (0x30) 49 (0x31)

26 26 50 (0x32) 51 (0x33)

27 27 52 (0x34) 53 (0x35)

28 28 54 (0x36) 55 (0x37)

29 29 56 (0x38) 57 (0x39)

30 30 58 (0x3A) 59 (0x3B)

31 31 60 (0x3C) 61 (0x3D)

32 32 62 (0x3E) 63 (0x3F)

Note :
i) Shorting of Pins at Back Plane represents `0'
ii) Opening of Pins at Back Plane represents `1'
iii) Base Module number (16) Back Planes ids are shown as under.
COPY 1(BPU) COPY 0 (BPU)
LSB LSB
o o W21 o o W17 o--- o W13 o o W9
o o W22 o o W18 o o W14 o---o W10
o o W23 o o W19 o o W15 o---o W11
o o W24 o o W20 o o W16 o---o W12
MSB MSB
3. Jack out the concerned IFC card of bus 1 for that BM.
4. Switch on BPU and TSU of the concerned BM. BM will get path
to CMS1 or CMS2 through TSC-0 or TSC-1 and it will start

INSTALLATION MANUAL 359


Chapter 18.

downloading the code. Check the message on BP terminal for


both ports enabled. Let path got is 98 9C 9E 66 i.e., BMS-0 (--)
SCIC (--)0 (--) TS-0 (--) CMS1. Message on BP terminal will come
as PO-1E for both ports enabled.
5. Reset the TSC-0, now 9e 66 path is broken it should get path
through 9f 66. If it gets the cross path i.e. 9f 66 then code load
will take place through this cross path put Base Module will not
get initialised unless and until it gets a direct path 9e 66 or 9f 67
which is must.
6. Check the status of all units of BM, they should be inservice.
There should not be any alarm for that Base Module on ADP
now.
7. Jack in BUS-1 IFC card and bring it inservice by PUT- SWU-
INS command.
8. Make BUS-0 IFC card of that BM OOS-OPR (Out of Service
Operator).
9. Give a soft start for that BM. It should get a path 9f 67, check
the message on BP terminal.
10. Give a reset to TSC-1 i.e. (9f ), now BM should get path 9e 67.
Code load in Base Module will take place but BM will not fully
initialise unless it gets a direct path 9f 67 or 9e 66.
11. Bring IFC card of bus 0 inservice by PUT SWU-INS command.
12. Interchange Switch Planes (SS-0), BM should remain stable.
There should not be any alarm on ADP for that base module.
13. Run diagnostics on all units of BM i.e., BP-0, BP-1, MU-0, MU-1,
BMS-0, BMS-1, SCIC-0, SCIC-1, TSC-0, TSC-1, MFCs, all
TICs... etc. and finally bring these units inservice through PUT-
SWU-INS command. Check the stability of BM in all
combinations. For all different combinations, run the
diagnostics' command files.
14. Run intra BM calls and check voice path.
15. Repeat steps 1 to 14 for all other BMs which are equipped.
16. Make inter BM calls and check the voice path.
17. When trunk Base Modules are up then create loop back data on
decadic as well as on MF trunks. Make some loop back calls and
check voice path.

360 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


FUNCTIONAL TESTING

18. Bring IOPs in Duplex by following the procedure explained in


C-DOT DSS IOP-VH user manual.

18.11. SUM AND ISTU TESTING

18.11.1. SUM Testing


Set up :
IOP-0 is INS-ACT
AM/CM/BM is initialized
SUM should be in principal TU only and if SUM is in BM-1, BM-2 should
not be RSU.
TSU-TU cable terminations are same as normal TU.
Refer section 16:3:16 for jumper settings in SUM and set the jumpers
accordingly.
BME jumper settings are to be depending upon the CPU used (BPC/HPC)
Refer page 10-212 to 10-215 for card slot details, power connections and
error signals.
Equip-frame as SU using equip-frame command
Connect VDU terminals on SU7-0 and SU7-1 controllers through BP
terminal cable for SUM
Switch on the power supplies and ensure the power on tests for SU7-0 and
SU7-1 are completed successfully
Equip the PHC cards using equip-trml-card command and bring the TUC
cards in-service
Wait for some time so that code loading will start
After code code load RUN DGN on SU7-0 and SU7-1 and MU-1 using
standard procedure. IF DGN fails take appropriate action, give DGN
again. Finally, all the controller in SUM should be in-service and
interchange of SU7 should be smooth.
Tst-Trm : S02 should be conducted for all the PHC cards

Note :
i) Atleast one PHC card should be equipped for code-loading to take
place.
ii) For all the SUM related commands the module should be specified as
SUM only.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 361


Chapter 18.

18.11.2. ISTU Testing

Set-up
IOP-0 is INS-ACT
AM/CM/BM is initialized
TSU-TU cables will terminate on slot 14, B connection, tab 1 and 2 and
slot 17, B connection tab 1 and 2. Refer appendix III for details.
Refer page 10-216 for card slot details. Power and error cable terminals
are same as normal TU (ATU)
Since ISTU cannot be concentrated, it may be equipped as principal TU
one, using command equip-frame and FRM-TYP as ITU.
Run DGN on T1XX-0 or T1XX-1 and ICCX-0 or ICCX-1 using standard
procedure. If DGN fails, take appropriate action.
All the controllers should in in-service and interchange should be smooth
Test set details for BRI/PRI are available in Appendix-A of the
maintenance procedure document.

18.12. SYSTEM INITIALISATION IN DIFFERENT CONFIGURATIONS

Set up
Both IOPs are inservice (Duplex)

1. Switch on the HPU, SCU, BTUs, SSUs of CM and any 16 BMs.


2. Wait for some time so that complete system comes up.
3. Check the status of all units in AM, CM and BMs. They should
be inservice. There should not be any alarms on ADP for any
unit except the BMs which are powered off.
4. Repeat step 1 to 3 by switching on remaining BMs till full
configurations initialised.

18.13. INTER BM TESTING


Set up
• System initialised with minimum 2 BMs up such that IFC card should not be
of same BM. Let BM1 and BM3 be inservice.

1. Make inter BM calls, they should be successful and check the speech.

362 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


FUNCTIONAL TESTING

2. Make BUS-1 OOS-OPR for BM1 and BM3 i.e. IFC17 and IFC-18
should be OOS-OPR. Now make inter BM calls, calls should be
successful and check speech. Bring IFC17 & IFC18 inservice.
3. Make BUS-0 OOS-OPR for BM1 and BM3 i.e. IFC1 and IFC2 should
be OOS-OPR. Now make inter BM calls, calls should be successful and
check speech. Bring IFC1 and IFC2 inservice.
4. Make BUS-0 OOS-OPR for BM1 and BUS-1 OOS-OPR for BM3 i.e.
IFC1 and IFC18 should be OOS-OPR. Now make inter BM calls, calls
should be successful and check speech. Bring IFC1 and IFC18
inservice.
5. Make BUS-1 OOS-OPR for BM1 and bus-0 OOS-OPR for BM3 i.e.
IFC2 and IFC17 should be OOS-OPR. Now make inter BM calls, calls
should be successful and check speech. Bring IFC2 and IFC17
inservice.
6. Make inter BM calls in all BMs and check voice path.

18.14. ALARM TESTING

18.14.1. HPU Alarm Test

Set up
A full duplex system

1. Switch off one power supply of plane 0 of HPU, alarm should


come on ADP and OOD indicating plane 0 power supply faulty
in HPU. Check status of all units in AM and CMSs. They all
should be inservice.
2. Switch on the PSU for AP-0 plane, alarm for PSU of HPU should
be cleared.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all other PSUs in HPU taking one at a
time.

18.14.2. SCU Alarm Test

Set up
A full duplex system

1. Make SSC-0, MU-0, SSBID-0, CLK-0, OOS-OPR, but SSC-1, MU-1,


SSBID-1, CLK-1 should be INS-ACT.
2. Switch off PSU (in slot 3) of plane 0 of SCU. No alarm.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 363


Chapter 18.

3. Switch off PSU (slot 1) plane 0 of SCU, alarm should come indicating
plane 0 PSU faulty in SCU.
4. Switch on the both PSUs back, alarm for PSU in SCU should be
cleared.
5. Make all the units inservice.
6. Repeat step 1 to 5 for PSU cards of plane 1.

18.14.3. BTU Alarm Test

Set up
A duplex system

1. Switch off one power supply of plane 0 of BTU0, alarm should be


raised indicating one of the power supply is faulty in plane 0 of
BTU0. Check the status of all IFC cards which are equipped.
They should be inservice active.
2. Switch on the power supply of plane 0 of BTU0, alarm for PSU
on ADP & OOD should be cleared.
3. Repeat steps 1 to 2 for all other PSU cards of BTU0 and BTU1
taking one at a time.

18.14.4. SSU Alarm Test

Set up
A duplex system

1. Switch off one PSU of plane 0 of SSU0. Alarm should be raised


on ADP and OOD indicating one PSU in SSU0 faulty.
2. Switch on the PSU of SSU0, alarm should be cleared.
3. Repeat step 1 to 2 for other PSU cards of SSU0 and SSU1 taking
one at a time.

18.15. SYSTEM STABILITY


For checking that the whole configuration is stable in different combinations it is
very essential to do rigorous diagnostics on all units of Central Module as well as on
all Base Modules. Hence following command files are made and they are run at
night for checking the stability of the full configuration. Command files create log
files with original name and extension .log, check for error messages and take
remedial action.

364 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


FUNCTIONAL TESTING

18.15.1. DGNAPU.COM

Set up
A duplex system

This command file covers diagnostics on all units of AM.


put-swu-oos for AP-0
put-swu-ins for AP-0
frc-swu-ins for AP-0
put-swu-oos for AP-1
put-swu-ins for AP-1
frc-swu-ins for AP-1
put-swu-oos for MU-0
put-swu-ins for MU-0
frc-swu-ins for MU-0
put-swu-oos for MU-1
put-swu-ins for MU-1
frc-swu-ins for MU-1
Interchange AP
put-swu-oos for MU-0
put-swu-ins for MU-0
frc-swu-ins for MU-0
put-swu-oos for MU-1
put-swu-ins for MU-1
frc-swu-ins for MU-1
interchange AP

18.15.2. DGNSCU.COM

Set up
A duplex system

This command files cover the diagnostics on all units of CM.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 365


Chapter 18.

put-swu-oos for SSC-0


put-swu-ins for SSC-0
frc-swu-ins for SSC-0
put-swu-oos for SSC-1
put-swu-ins for SSC-1
frc-swu-ins for SSC-1
{ put-swu-oos for CMS1 }
A { put-swu-ins for CMS1 }
{ frc-swu-ins for CMS1 }
{ put-swu-oos for CMS2 }
B { put-swu-ins for CMS2 }
{ frc-swu-ins for CMS2 }
{ put-swu-oos for CMS3 }
C { put-swu-ins for CMS3 }
{ frc-swu-ins for CMS3 }
{ put-swu-oos for CMS4 }
D { put-swu-ins for CMS4 }
{ frc-swu-ins for CMS4 }
{ put-swu-oos for CLK-0 }
E { put-swu-ins for CLK-0 }
{ frc-swu-ins for CLK-0 }
{ put-swu-oos for CLK-1 }
F { put-swu-ins for CLK-1 }
{ frc-swu-ins for CLK-1 }
{ put-swu-oos for IFCs }
E { put-swu-ins for IFCs }
{ frc-swu-ins for IFCs }
{ put-swu-oos for SS-0 }
F { put-swu-ins for SS-0 }
{ frc-swu-ins for SS-0 }
{ put-swu-oos for SS-1 }
G { put-swu-ins for SS-1 }
{ frc-swu-ins for SS-1 }
Interchange SSC and repeat above steps A to G.

366 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


FUNCTIONAL TESTING

18.15.3. DGNBMNN.COM

Set up
A duplex system
This command file covers the diagnostics on all units of Base Module
number NN. We have to make command files for all Base Modules which
are equipped.

{ put-swu-oos for BP-0 }


A { put-swu-ins for BP-0 }
{ frc-swu-ins for BP-0 }
{ put-swu-oos for BP-1 }
B { put-swu-ins for BP-1 }
{ frc-swu-ins for BP-1 }
{ put-swu-oos for BMS-0 }
C { put-swu-ins for BMS-0 }
{ frc-swu-ins for BMS-0 }
{ put-swu-oos for BMS-1 }
D { put-swu-ins for BMS-1 }
{ frc-swu-ins for BMS-1 }
{ put-swu-oos for SCIC-0 }
E { put-swu-ins for SCIC-0 }
{ frc-swu-ins for SCIC-0 }
{ put-swu-oos for SCIC-1 }
F { put-swu-ins for SCIC-1 }
{ frc-swu-ins for SCIC-1 }
{ put-swu-oos for TSC-0 }
G { put-swu-ins for TSC-0 }
{ frc-swu-ins for TSC-0 }
{ put-swu-oos for TSC-1 }
H { put-swu-ins for TSC-1 }
{ frc-swu-ins for TSC-1 }
{ put-swu-oos for MFCs }
I { put-swu-ins for MFCs }
{ frc-swu-ins for MFCs }
{ frc-swu-oos for TTC }
J { put-swu-ins for TTC }

INSTALLATION MANUAL 367


Chapter 18.

{ put-swu-oos for TICs }


K { put-swu-ins for TICs }
{ frc-swu-ins for TICs }
{ put-swu-oos for MU-0 }
L { put-swu-ins for MU-0 }
{ frc-swu-ins for MU-0 }
{ put-swu-oos for MU-1 }
M { put-swu-ins for MU-1 }
{ frc-swu-ins for MU-1 }
Interchange BMS-0
Interchange SCIC-0
Interchange TSC-0
Interchange BP and repeat steps A to M

18.15.4. TSTTRMNN.COM

Set up
A duplex system

Make command files for all Base Modules covering all lines and trunks
of all types for testing the equipped terminals. NN is the number of
base module equipped.

18.16. LOAD TESTING


Set up
• A duplex system.
• System is completely initialised in full configuration with all units inservice.

1. Connect a LTG such that line terminations are coming from different
BMs.
2. Run a load of successful inter BM calls such that total traffic on any
BM should not exceed 6000. All types of calls should be made i.e.
Decadic and MF with two way, E&M & Digital loop backs.
3. Check the stability of the system and call failures. The grade of service
should be 0.0003 i.e. three call failures out of 1000 call attempts.

368 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


FUNCTIONAL TESTING

18.17. EXCHANGE SYNCHRONISATION WITH NETWORK CLOCK


C-DOT MAX-XL exchange with NSC-AO1 Card (Level 2 clock) in SCU frame of
CM-XL supports network synchronisation with TAX clock or higher order atomic
clock.
In this case, data transfer rate through modems yields very good throughput in case
of inter-exchange data calls.
Synchronisation of the exchange with TAX Clock is done as shown in Fig. 18.2.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 369


Chapter 18.

370 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


Appendix - I

BM Equipage Procedure
This Appendix explains the procedure for equipping a Base Module in MAX-XL.
Please follow the procedure in this sequence.
Note
For expansion of existing exchanges, please refer to C-DOT DSS MAX-XL exchange
operation Document.
PROCEDURE TO EQUIP A BM :
1. Take the one IOP [say IOP-0] to Warm start level using init-iop command.
2. IOPXX) cd /u/admn/cmdfile
3. Invoke utility conv_cmd with physical bm no. in a command line parameter
e.g. to equip BM No. 5 give :

IOPxx ) sh conv_cmd l
The following are the input parameters.
Configuration : xl
BM Number [1 to 32] : 5
Normal/Remote [N/R] : N
4. Invoke crp
5. Execute the following crp commands at crp prompt.

< exec-cmd-file:aemod.cmdo;
< exec-cmd-file:aefrm.cmdo;
< exec-cmd-file:amslm.cmdo;
< exec-cmd-file:aesrv.cmdo;
< exec-cmd-file:amtam.cmdo;
< exec-cmd-file:aemfc.cmdo;

371 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


Appendix - I

Warning : After each step come out of crp and check the log.
6. If it is a Digital BM (i.e., all TUs are DTUs), unequip TTC by uneq-srv-card
command.
7. Repeat steps 3 to 7 to equip all other BMs.
8. Invoke crp and (exec.cmd file : amlpr.cmd;
9. Shut down and Boot the IOP-0 after all BMs are equipped.
10. Bring IOP-1 to warmstart level if it is inservice.
11. Bring IOP-0 to INS level by giving command INIT-IOP:5,1;
12. Give part-init to the system.

Now that the BM equipping part is over, the actual exchange data generation
can be done.
PROCEDURE TO BE FOLLOWED FOR PREPARATION OF DATA :
13. Invoke crp (Refer note 1 below for information about the following command
files).

crp
Create the command files through CRE-CMD-FILE command Execute them
one by one using the commands given below in the order given.
* (exec-cmd-file:fil-nam=aefrm.cmd,break=y;
(exec-cmd-file:fil-nam=aetrm.cmd,break=y;
(exec-cmd-file:fil-nam=aemfc.cmd,break=y;
(exec-cmd-file:fil-nam=aesrv.cmd,break=y;
(exec-cmd-file:fil-nam=amxcd.cmd,break=y;
(exec-cmd-file:fil-nam=amans.cmd,break=y;
(exec-cmd-file:fil-nam=actgp.cmd,break=y;
(exec-cmd-file:fil-nam=acsub.cmd,break=y;
(exec-cmd-file:fil-nam=acrut.cmd,break=y;
! (exec-cmd-file:fil-nam=achgp.cmd,break=y;
(exec-cmd-file:fil-nam=amdty.cmd,break=y;

372 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


BM EQUIPAGE PROCEDURE

! (exec-cmd-file:fil-nam=acsgp.cmd,break=y;
(exec-cmd-file:fil-nam=acsrt.cmd,break=y;
(exec-cmd-file:fil-nam=acslv.cmd,break=y;
(exec-cmd-file:fil-nam=amsdr.cmd,break=y;
! (exec-cmd-file:fil-nam=afabs.cmd,break=y;
! (exec-cmd-file:fil-nam=afsal.cmd,break=y;
! (exec-cmd-file:fil-nam=afdiv.cmd,break=y;
! (exec-cmd-file:fil-nam=afhil.cmd,break=y;
! (exec-cmd-file:fil-nam=afsog.cmd,break=y;
! (exec-cmd-file:fil-nam=afqng.cmd,break=y;
LEGEND :
* If some more frames are to be equipped as in the case of concentration.
! These command files are optional i.e., these are to be used if some hunt
groups or service groups are to be created or if some extra features are
to be granted to subscribers.
WARNINGS :
The given order of command file execution is to be STRICTLY followed.
After execution of each command file ensure its successful completion by
looking at the log files.
Execution of amdty.cmd is COMPULSORY. During generation of bare
minimum data the current day's type did not get modified.
Only on execution of the command file, (i.e., amdty.cmd) will the day type get
modified.
14. Since the log files occupy space unnecessarily they should be deleted as soon
as the data is prepared.

cd \u\admn\cmdfile
rm -f *.log
16. If required, IOPs can be brought into duplex at this stage.

INSTALLATION MANUAL 373


Appendix - I

Note : 1
aefrm.cmd - command file for equipping frames
aetrm.cmd - command file for equipping terminal cards
aemfc.cmd - command file for equipping service cards
amxcd.cmd - command file for creating & modifying exchange
code
amans.cmd - command file for modifying answering circuit
numbers
actgp.cmd - command file for creating trunk groups
acsub.cmd - command file for creating subscribers
acrut.cmd - command file for creating routes
achgp.cmd - command file for creating hunt groups
amdty.cmd - command file for modifying day type
acsgp.cmd - command file for creating service group
acsrt.cmd - command file for creating special routes
acslv.cmd - command file for making a lvn supervisor
amsdr.cmd - command file for modifying system directory
number
afabs.cmd - command file for granting absentee facility
afsal.cmd - command file for granting Semi-Automatic Alarm
afdiv.cmd - command file for granting diversion facility
afhil.cmd - command file for granting hold line facility
afsog.cmd - command file for granting subscriber controlled
O/G call Restriction
afqng.cmd - command file for granting subscriber queueing
facility
Note : 2
For ILT Exchange :
MOD-SYS-PARAM:PAR-NAM=OWN-STD-LEN,PAR-VAL= (Length of the
ILT code)

374 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


BM EQUIPAGE PROCEDURE

CRE-SPL-ROUT:RUT-COD-mmm.RUT-FLG=1-CNB-NA-GA, CRG-RTN=1-8,
ILT=Y;
mmm = Exchange code appended to ILT code.
For eg, if the ILT code is 01793 and exchange code is 2 then the commands to
be given are :
MOD-SYS-PARM:PAR-NAM=OWN-STD-LEN,PAR-VAL=5;
CRE-SPL-ROUT:RUT-COD=017932,RUT-FLG=1-CNB-NA-GA,CRG-RTN=
1-8, ILT=Y;
Note : 3
For Satellite Exchange :
Routes may be created in a similar manner.
For eg, if the ILT code is 01793 and Satellite exchange code is 81 then the
commands to be given are :
MOD-SYS-PARAM:PAR-NAM=OWN-LEN, PAR-VAL=5;
CRE-SPL-ROUT:RUT-COD=0179381, RUT-FLG=1-CNB-NA-GA,
CRG-RTN=1-8, ILT=Y;

INSTALLATION MANUAL 375


Appendix - II

Modifications for Enhanced Subscriber


Service Unit (ESU) Equipment
This appendix explains the modifications required in CCM card to used Enhanced
Subscriber Service Unit (ESU) equipment designed by C-DOT for supporting
Calling Line Identification (CLI) and checkmeter facilities.
In CCM cards for CLI and checkmeter port 7 or port 8 only has to be used, but for
CLI alone any port can be used after making following modifications in that
particular port only.
Cuts and strap indicated in Fig. AII-1, AII-2, AII-3 are to be done as shown below in
CCM card APC-CCM 241/T-A00 (on main card only).
Connection of ESU to Cuts Straps Figure

Port 1 C9 & C10 S8&S11 AII.2


AII.3

Port 2 C1 S9&S10 AII.1


C8 AII.2
AII.3

Port 3 C7 AII.2
S7 AII.3

Port 4 C6 AII.2
S6 AII.3

Port 5 C5 S5 AII.2
AII.3

Port 6 C3&C5 S3&S4 AII.2


AII.3

Port 7 C2 S2 AII.2
AII.3

Port 8 C1 S1 AII.2
AII.3

INSTALLATION MANUAL 376


Appendix - III

ISTU Related Remarks


ISDN unit placement and other related remarks :-
i) ISTU concentration is not supported presently.
ii) ISTU can be placed in any BM, but preferably in "TRUNK BM A+D )".
iii) TTC cards equipped in 4th TU is assumed that ISTU will be placed in 1st,
2nd or 3rd TU position only.
iv ) There can be more than one ISTU in any configuration if required.
v) The corresponding cables coming from time switch to TU should be
terminated as given below :-
TTXX Cable Position in TU TTXX Cable Position in ISTU

X/P/Q/R/S/T X/P/Q/R/S/T

X/P/Q/13/A/1 X/P/Q/14/B/1

X/P/Q/13/A/2 X/P/Q/14/B/2

X/P/Q/14/A/1 X/P/Q/17/B/1

X/P/Q/14/A/2 X/P/Q/17/B/2

Where X= Any BM number ( 1 to 32)


P= Rack Number = 1
Q= Frame Number = 2 or 3
R= Slot No.
S= Connector Row Number (A,B)
T= Position on Connector (1 → 4 ) (also indicates tab position to be
retained)

377 C-DOT DSS MAX-XL


Appendix - IV

Procedure for Network Synchronization


Reference Clock extracted from DTS card in Digital Trunk is to be fed to both copies
of NSC for synchronization purpose. A maximum of 3 reference clock can be
provided at NSC reference clock input. For synchronizing with TAX, reference clock
extracted from DTS card of any digital trunk connected to TAX may be taken as
first reference clock input and selected as first reference clock input. The procedure
for synchronization is detailed below :
* Prepare reference clock cables as per the assembly drawing given. Depending
on no. clocks to be taken as reference, a maximum of 3 cables may be
prepared.
* Two nos. of ICs 26 LS31 are to be mounted on DTS 066/T-S04 card and straps
to be done as per the strap list given. This DTS card is to be used in digital
trunk slot which is used for reference clock. A maximum 3 DTS cards may be
modified depending on no. of reference clocks used (RCLK0, RCLK1, RCLK2).
No changes are required if APC-DTS495/F-S00 card is used.
* Commands used for clock source equippage are given below:
CRP Command Remarks

MOD-CLKSRC-EQPAG To equip/unequip clock source

SEL-CLK-SRC To select clock source

PUT-NSC-CLK-INS To put NSC clock in service

PUT-NSC-CLK-DOS To put NSC clock out of service

DGN-NSC-CLK To diagnose NSC clock source

FRC-NSC-CLK-OOS Force NSC clock out of service

FRC-NSC-CLK-INS Force NSC clock in service

DISPL-CRNT-CLK-SRC Display currently tuned clock sources

INSTALLATION MANUAL 378


PROCEDURE FOR NETWORK SYNCHRONIZATION

Changes to done in EPC DTS066/T-S04. Two layer card strap list for NSC clock
driving
Mount IC 26LS31 (2 Nos. ) on U104 and U113 with Pin no.1 towards the connector.
Do the following straps.
S1 Connect AC10 to U113/1 S12 Connect U104/7 to U113/15

S2 Connect U113/1 to U104/1 S13 Connect U113/15 to U113/9

S3 Connect U113/2 to Ba19 S14 Connect U113/9 to U113/8

S4 Connect U113/3 to Bc19 S15 Connect U113/8 to U113/7

S5 Connect U104/2 to Ba20 S16 Connect U113/7 to Aa1&Ac1

S6 Connect U104/3 to Bc20 S17 Connect U104/12 to U113/12

S7 Connect U113/16 to U104/16 S18 Connect U113/12 to U29/6

S8 Connect U104/16 to Ba32 S19 Connect U104/4 to RN6/2 & Bc32

S9 Connect U104/15 to U104/9 S20 Connect RN62 to U113/4

S10 Connect U104/9 to U104/8 S21 Connect U113/4 to U12/1

S11 Connect U194/8 to U104/7

INSTALLATION MANUAL 379

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen